[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

WO2024155846A1 - Compositions useful for modulating splicing - Google Patents

Compositions useful for modulating splicing Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024155846A1
WO2024155846A1 PCT/US2024/012061 US2024012061W WO2024155846A1 WO 2024155846 A1 WO2024155846 A1 WO 2024155846A1 US 2024012061 W US2024012061 W US 2024012061W WO 2024155846 A1 WO2024155846 A1 WO 2024155846A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
compound
cycloalkyl
pharmaceutically acceptable
acceptable salt
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2024/012061
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Hasane Ratni
Ingo Konetzki
Brian Lucas
Michael Luzzio
Original Assignee
Skyhawk Therapeutics, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Skyhawk Therapeutics, Inc. filed Critical Skyhawk Therapeutics, Inc.
Publication of WO2024155846A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024155846A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system

Definitions

  • SCA3 Spinocerebellar Ataxia 3
  • SCA3 Machado-Joseph Disease
  • a rare, inherited, neurodegenerative, autosomal dominant disease It is characterized by progressive degeneration of the brainstem, cerebellum and spinal cord, however, neurons in other areas of the brain are also affected.
  • Presenting features include gait problems, speech difficulties, clumsiness, and often visual blurring and diplopia; saccadic eye movements become slow and ophthalmoparesis develops, resulting initially in up-gaze restriction. Ambulation becomes increasingly difficult, leading to the need for assistive devices 10 to 15 years following onset. Late in the disease course, individuals are wheelchair bound and have severe dysarthria, dysphagia, facial and temporal atrophy. The disease progresses relentlessly until death occurs at any time from 6 to approximately 30 years after onset through pulmonary complications.
  • SCA3 is caused by CAG tri-nucleotide repeats in exon 10 of the Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) gene.
  • ATXN3 encodes for a deubiquinase with wide-ranging functions, but it does not appear to be an essential gene.
  • Disease causing variants of the ATXN3 gene have approximately 40 to over 200 CAG tri-nucleotide repeats in exon 10.
  • Expanded CAG repeats in the ATXN3 gene are translated into expanded polyglutamine repeats (polyQ) in the ataxin-3 protein and this toxic Ataxin 3 protein is associated with aggregates.
  • the polyglutamine expanded ataxin-3 protein in these aggregates is ubiquitinated and the aggregates contain other proteins, including heat shock proteins and transcription factors. Aggregates are frequently observed in the brain tissue of SCA3 patients. There are currently no treatments for SCA3.
  • compositions comprising a compound disclosed herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
  • a method of modulating splicing of a Ataxin3 (ATXN3) pre-mRNA comprising contacting a small molecule splicing modulator compound disclosed herein (SMSM) to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA with a splice site sequence or cells comprising the ATXN3 pre- mRNA, wherein the SMSM binds to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of a subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA.
  • SMSM small molecule splicing modulator compound disclosed herein
  • a method of treating, preventing, delaying of progress, or ameliorating symptoms of a disease or a condition associated with Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) expression level or activity level in a subject in need thereof comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a small molecule splicing modulator compound disclosed herein (SMSM), wherein the SMSM binds to a pre-mRNA encoded by ATXN3 and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of the subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA, wherein the amount of full length ATXN3 is reduced.
  • SMSM small molecule splicing modulator compound disclosed herein
  • SMSM small molecule splicing modulator
  • a cell component e.g., DNA, RNA, pre-mRNA, protein, RNP, snRNA, carbohydrates, lipids, co-factors, nutrients, and/or metabolites
  • a SMSM can bind to a polynucleotide, e.g., an RNA (e.g., a pre-mRNA) with an aberrant splice site, resulting in steric modulation of the polynucleotide.
  • a SMSM can bind to a protein, e.g.
  • a SMSM can bind to a spliceosome component, e.g., a spliceosome protein or snRNA resulting in steric modulation of the spliceosome protein or snRNA.
  • a SMSM is a compound of Formula (I).
  • the term “small molecule splicing modulator” or “SMSM” specifically excludes compounds consisting of oligonucleotides.
  • Steps in the spatial orientation of chemical moieties with respect to each other refers to changes in the spatial orientation of chemical moieties with respect to each other.
  • steric mechanisms include, but are not limited to, steric hindrance, steric shielding, steric attraction, chain crossing, steric repulsions, steric inhibition of resonance, and steric inhibition of protonation.
  • the combination arylalkylheterocycloalkyl refers to a heterocycloalkyl-radical which is substituted by an alkyl which is substituted by an aryl.
  • the term “one or more” refers to the range from one substituent to the highest possible number of substitutions, i. e. , replacement of one hydrogen up to replacement of all hydrogens by substituents.
  • substituted denotes an atom or a group of atoms replacing a hydrogen atom on the parent molecule.
  • Ci-C x includes C1-C2, C1-C3... Ci-C x .
  • a group designated as “C1-C4” indicates that there are one to four carbon atoms in the moiety, i.e. groups containing 1 carbon atom, 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms or 4 carbon atoms.
  • C1-C4 alkyl indicates that there are one to four carbon atoms in the alkyl group, i.e., the alkyl group is selected from among methyl, ethyl, propyl, Ao-propyl, w-butyl. Ao-butyl, secbutyl, and /-butyl.
  • Carboxyl refers to -COOH.
  • Cyano refers to -CN.
  • halo halogen
  • halide halogen
  • alkyl refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain radical, having from one to twenty carbon atoms, and which is attached to the rest of the molecule by a single bond.
  • An alkyl comprising up to 10 carbon atoms is referred to as a C1-C10 alkyl, likewise, for example, an alkyl comprising up to 6 carbon atoms is a Ci-Ce alkyl.
  • Alkyls (and other moieties defined herein) comprising other numbers of carbon atoms are represented similarly.
  • Alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, C1-C10 alkyl, C1-C9 alkyl, Ci-C 8 alkyl, C1-C7 alkyl, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C1-C5 alkyl, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C2 alkyl, C2-C8 alkyl, C3-G alkyl and C4-C8 alkyl.
  • Representative alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, w-propyl. 1-methylethyl (z-propyl), w-butyl. i- butyl, s bntyl. w-pcntyl.
  • alkyl 1,1 -dimethylethyl (/-butyl). 3-methylhexyl, 2-methylhexyl, 1-ethyl-propyl, and the like.
  • the alkyl is methyl or ethyl.
  • the alkyl is - CH(CH 3 ) 2 or -C(CH 3 ) 3 .
  • an alkyl group may be optionally substituted as described below.
  • Alkylene or “alkylene chain” refers to a straight or branched divalent hydrocarbon chain linking the rest of the molecule to a radical group.
  • the alkylene is -CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 -, or -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 - In some embodiments, the alkylene is -CH 2 -. In some embodiments, the alkylene is -CH 2 CH 2 -. In some embodiments, the alkylene is -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -.
  • alkoxy refers to a radical of the formula -OR where R is an alkyl radical as defined. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, an alkoxy group may be optionally substituted as described below. Representative alkoxy groups include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy. In some embodiments, the alkoxy is methoxy. In some embodiments, the alkoxy is ethoxy.
  • alkylamino refers to a radical of the formula -NHR or -NRR where each R is, independently, an alkyl radical as defined above. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, an alkylamino group may be optionally substituted as described below.
  • alkenyl refers to a type of alkyl group in which at least one carbon-carbon double bond is present.
  • R is H or an alkyl.
  • an alkenyl is selected from ethenyl (z.e., vinyl), propenyl (z.e., allyl), butenyl, pentenyl, pentadienyl, and the like.
  • alkynyl refers to a type of alkyl group in which at least one carbon-carbon triple bond is present.
  • R is H or an alkyl.
  • an alkynyl is selected from ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl, and the like.
  • aromatic refers to a planar ring having a delocalized 71-electron system containing 4n+271 electrons, where n is an integer. Aromatics can be optionally substituted.
  • aromatic includes both aryl groups (e.g., phenyl, naphthalenyl) and heteroaryl groups (e.g., pyridinyl, furanyl, quinolinyl).
  • aryl refers to a radical derived from a hydrocarbon ring system comprising at least one aromatic ring wherein each of the atoms forming the ring is a carbon atom. Aryl groups can be optionally substituted.
  • aryl groups include, but are not limited to phenyl, and naphthyl. In some embodiments, the aryl is phenyl. Depending on the structure, an aryl group can be a monoradical or a diradical (z.e., an arylene group). Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, the term “aryl” or the prefix “ar-”(such as in “aralkyl”) is meant to include aryl radicals that are optionally substituted. In some embodiments, an aryl group is partially reduced to form a cycloalkyl group defined herein. In some embodiments, an aryl group is fully reduced to form a cycloalkyl group defined herein.
  • haloalkyl denotes an alkyl group wherein at least one of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group has been replaced by same or different halogen atoms, particularly fluoro atoms.
  • haloalkyl include monofluoro-, difluoro-or trifluoro-methyl, -ethyl or -propyl, for example, 3,3,3-trifluoropropyl, 2-fluoroethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, fluoromethyl, or trifluoromethyl.
  • perhaloalkyl denotes an alkyl group where all hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group have been replaced by the same or different halogen atoms.
  • exemplary haloalkyl groups further include trifluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, fluoromethyl, trichloromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 1,2- difluoroethyl, 3-bromo-2-fluoropropyl, 1,2-dibromoethyl, and the like.
  • a haloalkyl group may be optionally substituted.
  • Hydroxyalkyl refers to an alkyl radical, as defined above, that is substituted by one or more hydroxyls. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one hydroxyl. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one, two, or three hydroxyls. Hydroxyalkyl include, for example, hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, hydroxybutyl, or hydroxypentyl. In some embodiments, the hydroxyalkyl is hydroxymethyl.
  • Aminoalkyl refers to an alkyl radical, as defined above, that is substituted by one or more amines. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one amine. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one, two, or three amines. Aminoalkyl include, for example, aminomethyl, aminoethyl, aminopropyl, aminobutyl, or aminopentyl. In some embodiments, the aminoalkyl is aminomethyl.
  • Cyanoalkyl refers to an alkyl radical, as defined above, that is substituted by one or more cyano groups. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one cyano group. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one, two, or three cyano groups. Aminoalkyl include, for example, cyanomethyl, cyanoethyl, cyanopropyl, cyanobutyl, or cyanopentyl.
  • haloalkoxy denotes an alkoxy group wherein at least one of the hydrogen atoms of the alkoxy group has been replaced by same or different halogen atoms, particularly fluoro atoms.
  • haloalkoxyl include monofluoro-, difluoro-or trifluoro-methoxy, -ethoxy or -propoxy, for example, 3,3,3-trifluoropropoxy, 2-fluoroethoxy, 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy, fluoromethoxy, or trifluoromethoxy.
  • haloalkoxy denotes an alkoxy group where all hydrogen atoms of the alkoxy group have been replaced by the same or different halogen atoms.
  • haloalkoxyl further include trifluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, fluoromethoxy, trichloromethoxy, 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy, 1,2-difluoroethoxy, 3-bromo-2-fluoropropoxy, 1,2-dibromoethoxy, and the like.
  • a haloalkoxy group may be optionally substituted.
  • bicyclic ring system denotes two rings which are fused to each other via a common single or double bond (annelated bicyclic ring system), via a sequence of three or more common atoms (bridged bicyclic ring system) or via a common single atom (spiro bicyclic ring system).
  • Bicyclic ring systems can be saturated, partially unsaturated, unsaturated, or aromatic.
  • Bicyclic ring systems can comprise heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S.
  • Carbocyclic or “carbocycle” refer to a ring or ring system where the atoms forming the backbone of the ring are all carbon atoms. The term thus distinguishes carbocyclic from “heterocyclic” rings or “heterocycles” in which the ring backbone contains at least one atom which is different from carbon. In some embodiments, at least one of the two rings of a bicyclic carbocycle is aromatic. In some embodiments, both rings of a bicyclic carbocycle are aromatic. Carbocycle includes cycloalkyl and aryl.
  • cycloalkyl refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic non-aromatic radical, wherein each of the atoms forming the ring (z.e., skeletal atoms) is a carbon atom.
  • cycloalkyls are saturated or partially unsaturated.
  • cycloalkyls are spirocyclic or bridged compounds.
  • cycloalkyls are fused with an aromatic ring (in which case the cycloalkyl is bonded through a non-aromatic ring carbon atom).
  • Cycloalkyl groups include groups having from 3 to 10 ring atoms.
  • cycloalkyls include, but are not limited to, cycloalkyls having from three to ten carbon atoms, from three to eight carbon atoms, from three to six carbon atoms, or from three to five carbon atoms.
  • Monocyclic cycloalkyl radicals include, for example, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl.
  • the monocyclic cycloalkyl is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl.
  • the monocyclic cycloalkyl is cyclopentenyl or cyclohexenyl. In some embodiments, the monocyclic cycloalkyl is cyclopentenyl.
  • Polycyclic radicals include, for example, adamantyl, 1,2-dihydronaphthalenyl, 1,4-dihydronaphthalenyl, tetrainyl, decalinyl, 3,4- dihydronaphthalenyl-l(2H)-one, spiro[2.2]pentyl, norbomyl and bicycle [l.l.l]pentyl. Unless otherwise stated specifically in the specification, a cycloalkyl group may be optionally substituted.
  • bridged refers to any ring structure with two or more rings that contains a bridge connecting two bridgehead atoms.
  • the bridgehead atoms are defined as atoms that are the part of the skeletal framework of the molecule and which are bonded to three or more other skeletal atoms.
  • the bridgehead atoms are C, N, or P.
  • the bridge is a single atom or a chain of atoms that connects two bridgehead atoms.
  • the bridge is a valence bond that connects two bridgehead atoms.
  • the bridged ring system is cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, the bridged ring system is heterocycloalkyl.
  • fused refers to any ring structure described herein which is fused to an existing ring structure.
  • fused ring is a heterocyclyl ring or a heteroaryl ring
  • any carbon atom on the existing ring structure which becomes part of the fused heterocyclyl ring or the fused heteroaryl ring may be replaced with one or more N, S, and O atoms.
  • fused heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring structures include 6-5 fused heterocycle, 6-6 fused heterocycle, 5-6 fused heterocycle, 5-5 fused heterocycle, 7-5 fused heterocycle, and 5-7 fused heterocycle.
  • fluoroalkyl refers to an alkyl in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by a fluorine atom.
  • a fluoroalkyl is a Ci-Ce fluoroalkyl.
  • a fluoroalkyl is selected from trifluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, fluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 1- fluoromethyl-2-fIuoroethyl, and the like.
  • a heteroalkyl is attached to the rest of the molecule at a carbon atom of the heteroalkyl.
  • a heteroalkyl is attached to the rest of the molecule at a heteroatom of the heteroalkyl.
  • a heteroalkyl is a Ci-Ce heteroalkyl.
  • Representative heteroalkyl groups include, but are not limited to -OCTbOMc. -OCH2CH2OH, OC bC bOMc. or - OCH2CH2OCH2CH2NH2.
  • a heteroalkyl contains one skeletal heteroatom. In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl contains 1-3 skeletal heteroatoms.
  • heteroalkylene refers to an alkyl radical as described above where one or more carbon atoms of the alkyl is replaced with a O, N or S atom.
  • “Heteroalkylene” or “heteroalkylene chain” refers to a straight or branched divalent heteroalkyl chain linking the rest of the molecule to a radical group. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, the heteroalkyl or heteroalkylene group may be optionally substituted as described below.
  • Representative heteroalkylene groups include, but are not limited to -OCH2CH2O-, -OCH2CH2OCH2CH2O-, or - OCH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2O-.
  • heterocycloalkyl refers to a cycloalkyl group that includes at least one heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the heterocycloalkyl radical may be a monocyclic, or bicyclic ring system, which may include fused (when fused with an aryl or a heteroaryl ring, the heterocycloalkyl is bonded through a non-aromatic ring atom) or bridged ring systems.
  • a heterocycloalkyl is monocyclic.
  • a heterocycloalkyl is bicyclic.
  • a heterocycloalkyl is partially saturated.
  • a heterocycloalkyl is fully saturated.
  • the nitrogen, carbon, or sulfur atoms in the heterocyclyl radical may be optionally oxidized.
  • the nitrogen atom may be optionally quatemized.
  • the heterocycloalkyl radical is partially or fully saturated.
  • heterocycloalkyl radicals include, but are not limited to, dioxolanyl, thienyl[l,3]dithianyl, tetrahydroquinolyl, tetrahydroisoquinolyl, decahydroquinolyl, decahydroisoquinolyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, octahydroindolyl, octahydroisoindolyl, 2-oxopiperazinyl, 2-oxopiperidinyl, 2-oxopyrrolidinyl, oxazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, 4-piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, quinuclidinyl, thiazolidinyl, tetrahydrofuryl, trithianyl,
  • heterocycloalkyl also includes all ring forms of carbohydrates, including but not limited to monosaccharides, disaccharides, and oligosaccharides. Unless otherwise noted, heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 12 carbons in the ring. In some embodiments, heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 10 carbons in the ring. In some embodiments, heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 10 carbons in the ring and 1 or 2 N atoms. In some embodiments, heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 10 carbons in the ring and 3 or 4 N atoms.
  • heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 12 carbons, 0-2 N atoms, 0-2 O atoms, 0-2 P atoms, and 0-1 S atoms in the ring. In some embodiments, heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 12 carbons, 1-3 N atoms, 0-1 0 atoms, and 0-1 S atoms in the ring. It is understood that when referring to the number of carbon atoms in a heterocycloalkyl, the number of carbon atoms in the heterocycloalkyl is not the same as the total number of atoms (including the heteroatoms) that make up the heterocycloalkyl (i.e. skeletal atoms of the heterocycloalkyl ring). Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, a heterocycloalkyl group may be optionally substituted.
  • heterocycle refers to heteroaromatic rings (also known as heteroaryls) and heterocycloalkyl rings (also known as heteroalicyclic groups) that includes at least one heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, wherein each heterocyclic group has from 3 to 12 atoms in its ring system, and with the proviso that any ring does not contain two adjacent O or S atoms.
  • heterocycles are monocyclic, bicyclic, polycyclic, spirocyclic or bridged compounds.
  • Non-aromatic heterocyclic groups include rings having 3 to 12 atoms in its ring system and aromatic heterocyclic groups include rings having 5 to 12 atoms in its ring system.
  • the heterocyclic groups include benzo-fused ring systems.
  • non-aromatic heterocyclic groups are pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, oxazolidinonyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thioxanyl, piperazinyl, aziridinyl, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, thietanyl, homopiperidinyl, oxepanyl, thiepanyl, oxazepinyl, diazepinyl, thiazepinyl, 1 ,2,3,6— tetrahydropyridinyl, pyrrolin-2-yl, pyrrolin-3-yl, indolinyl, 2H-pyranyl, 4H-pyranyl, diox
  • aromatic heterocyclic groups are pyridinyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazinyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrrolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, indolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzofuranyl, cinnolinyl, indazolyl, indolizinyl, phthalazinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, isoindolyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, furazanyl, benzofurazanyl, benzothiophenyl, benzothiazolyl, benzoxazolyl, quinazolinyl, quinox
  • a group derived from pyrrole includes both pyrrol- 1-yl ( ' attached) or pyrrol-3-yl (C-attached).
  • a group derived from imidazole includes imidazol-l-yl or imidazol-3-yl (both ' attached) or imidazol-2-yl, imidazol-4-yl or imidazol-5-yl (all C-attached).
  • the heterocyclic groups include benzo-fused ring systems.
  • at least one of the two rings of a bicyclic heterocycle is aromatic.
  • both rings of a bicyclic heterocycle are aromatic.
  • heteroaryl refers to an aryl group that includes one or more ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the heteroaryl can be monocyclic or bicyclic.
  • Illustrative examples of monocyclic heteroaryls include pyridinyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazinyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrrolyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, furazanyl, indolizine, indole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, indazole, benzimidazole, purine, quinolizine, quinoline, isoquinoline, cinnoline, phthalazin
  • monocyclic heteroaryls include pyridinyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazinyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrrolyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, and furazanyl.
  • bicyclic heteroaryls include indolizine, indole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, indazole, benzimidazole, purine, quinolizine, quinoline, isoquinoline, cinnoline, phthalazine, quinazoline, quinoxaline, 1,8-naphthyridine, and pteridine.
  • heteroaryl is pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, thiazolyl, thienyl, thiadiazolyl or furyl.
  • a heteroaryl contains 0-6 N atoms in the ring.
  • a heteroaryl contains 1-4 N atoms in the ring. In some embodiments, a heteroaryl contains 4-6 N atoms in the ring. In some embodiments, a heteroaryl contains 0-4 N atoms, 0-1 0 atoms, 0-1 P atoms, and 0-1 S atoms in the ring. In some embodiments, a heteroaryl contains 1-4 N atoms, 0-1 0 atoms, and 0-1 S atoms in the ring. In some embodiments, heteroaryl is a C1-C9 heteroaryl. In some embodiments, monocyclic heteroaryl is a C1-C5 heteroaryl.
  • monocyclic heteroaryl is a 5-membered or 6-membered heteroaryl.
  • a bicyclic heteroaryl is a Ce-C heteroaryl.
  • a heteroaryl group is partially reduced to form a heterocycloalkyl group defined herein.
  • a heteroaryl group is fully reduced to form a heterocycloalkyl group defined herein.
  • optional substituents are independently selected from D, halogen, -CN, -NH2, -OH, -NH(CH 3 ), -N(CH 3 ) 3 , - NH(cyclopropyl), -CH 3 , CINC H,. -CF 3 , -OCH 3 , and -OCF 3 .
  • substituted groups are substituted with one or two of the preceding groups.
  • tautomer refers to a proton shift from one atom of a molecule to another atom of the same molecule.
  • the compounds presented herein may exist as tautomers. Tautomers are compounds that are interconvertible by migration of a hydrogen atom, accompanied by a switch of a single bond and adjacent double bond. In bonding arrangements where tautomerization is possible, a chemical equilibrium of the tautomers will exist. All tautomeric forms of the compounds disclosed herein are contemplated. The exact ratio of the tautomers depends on several factors, including temperature, solvent, and pH. Some examples of tautomeric interconversions include:
  • administer refers to the methods that may be used to enable delivery of compounds or compositions to the desired site of biological action. These methods include but are not limited to oral routes (p.o.), intraduodenal routes (i.d.), parenteral injection (including intravenous (i.v.), subcutaneous (s.c.), intraperitoneal (i.p.), intramuscular (i.m.), intravascular or infusion (inf.)), topical (top.) and rectal (p.r.) administration. Those of skill in the art are familiar with administration techniques that can be employed with the compounds and methods described herein. In some embodiments, the compounds and compositions described herein are administered orally.
  • co-administration or the like, as used herein, are meant to encompass administration of the selected therapeutic agents to a single patient and are intended to include treatment regimens in which the agents are administered by the same or different route of administration or at the same or different time.
  • the term “subject” or “patient” encompasses mammals.
  • mammals include, but are not limited to, any member of the mammalian class: humans, non-human primates such as chimpanzees, and other apes and monkey species; farm animals such as cattle, horses, sheep, goats, swine; domestic animals such as rabbits, dogs, and cats; laboratory animals including rodents, such as rats, mice and guinea pigs, and the like.
  • the mammal is a human.
  • the term “animal” as used herein comprises human beings and non-human animals.
  • a “non-human animal” is a mammal, for example a rodent such as rat or a mouse.
  • a non-human animal is a mouse.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable denotes an attribute of a material which is useful in preparing a pharmaceutical composition that is generally safe, non toxic, and neither biologically nor otherwise undesirable and is acceptable for veterinary as well as human pharmaceutical use.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable” can refer a material, such as a carrier or diluent, which does not abrogate the biological activity or properties of the compound, and is relatively nontoxic, i.e. , the material may be administered to an individual without causing undesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious manner with any of the components of the composition in which it is contained.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable excipient can be used interchangeably and denote any pharmaceutically acceptable ingredient in a pharmaceutical composition having no therapeutic activity and being nontoxic to the subject administered, such as disintegrators, binders, fillers, solvents, buffers, tonicity agents, stabilizers, antioxidants, surfactants, carriers, diluents, excipients, preservatives or lubricants used in formulating pharmaceutical products.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts denotes salts which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include both acid and base addition salts.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” can refer to a formulation of a compound that does not cause significant irritation to an organism to which it is administered and/or does not abrogate the biological activity and properties of the compound.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts are obtained by reacting a SMSM compound of the present disclosure with acids.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are also obtained by reacting a compound of the present disclosure with a base to form a salt.
  • small molecular weight compound can be used interchangeably with “small molecule” or “small organic molecule.” Small molecules refer to compounds other than peptides or oligonucleotides; and typically have molecular weights of less than about 2000 Daltons, e.g., less than about 900 Daltons.
  • SMSMs Small Molecule Splicing Modulators
  • SMSMs small molecule splicing modulators
  • a SMSM described herein is a compound of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof: wherein,
  • Ci-6 heteroalkyl Ci-6 alkylene, Ci-6 heteroalkylene, C3-10 cycloalkyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl are each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R 20 groups;
  • each R a3 , R b3 , R c3 , R d3 , R a4 , R b4 , R c4 , and R d4 is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C1-6 alkyl, C 2 .e alkenyl, C 2 .e alkynyl, C1-6 hydroxyalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, Ci- e alkoxy, - (C1-6 alkylene)-Ci-6 alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, -(C1-6 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, Ce- 10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein the C1-6 alkyl, C 2 -6 alkenyl, C 2 .e alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, -(C1-6 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, Ce
  • each R 20 is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO 2 , halo, oxo, C1-4 alkyl, C 2 -4 alkenyl, C 2 .4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, Ci-
  • R 24 is selected from the group consisting of H, halo, CN, NO2, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, OH, Ci-e alkoxyl, and C1-6 haloalkyl.
  • R 24 is selected from the group consisting of H, halo, CN, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, OH, Ci-e alkoxyl, and C1-6 haloalkyl.
  • R 24 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, OH, halo, CN, substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkoxyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-4 alkenyl, and substituted or unsubstituted C2-4 alkynyl.
  • R 24 is hydrogen.
  • R 24 is halogen.
  • R 24 is -Br.
  • R 24 is -F.
  • R 24 is -Cl.
  • R 24 is -CN.
  • R 24 is OH. In some embodiments, R 24 is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 24 is C1.4 haloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 24 is C1.4 alkoxyl. In some embodiments, R 24 is methyl. In some embodiments, R 24 is ethyl. In some embodiments, R 24 is cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 24 is cyclopropyl. In some embodiments, R 24 is C2-4 alkenyl. In some embodiments, R 24 is C2-4 alkynyl. In some embodiments, R 24 is ethynyl. In some embodiment, R 24 is propynyl.
  • R 21 is thiophenyl, which is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected R 1A groups; wherein each R 1A is independently selected from halo, Ci-ealkyl, Ci-ehaloalkyl, and Ci-ealkoxy.
  • R 21 is thiophenyl, which is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected R 1A groups; wherein each R 1A is independently selected from halo, Ci-3alkyl, Ci.shaloalkyl, and Cualkoxy.
  • each R 1A is independently selected from halo, CN, NO2, Cualkyl, Cuhaloalkyl. and Cualkoxy.
  • each R 1A is independently selected from halo, Ci.salkyl, Ci.shaloalkyl, and C’ualkoxy. In some embodiments, each R 1A is independently selected from halo, Ci.salkyl, and Ci.shaloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 1A is halo. In some embodiments, R 1A is fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo. In some embodiments, R 1A is fluoro. In some embodiments, R 1A is chloro. In some embodiments, R 1A is bromo. In some embodiments, R 1A is iodo.
  • R 21 is selected from the group consisting , In some embodiments, R 21 is . In some embodiments, R 21 some embodiments, In some embodiments, embodiments, R 21 is In some embodiments, some embodiments, R 21 is , [0067] In some embodiments, R 23 is H.
  • R 23 is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups, wherein each R 20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, amino, Ci-salkyl, Ci-salkoxy, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, carbamyl, and carbamoyl.
  • R 23 is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups, wherein each R 20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, and Ci-salkoxy.
  • R 23 is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups, wherein each R 20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, Ci-salkyl, Ci- shaloalkyl, amino, and C1.3alkoxy.
  • R 23 is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups, wherein each R 20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, amino, and Ci-salkoxy.
  • R 20 group is OH.
  • R 20 group is halo.
  • R 20 group is amino.
  • R 20 group is Ci-salkoxy.
  • R 23 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl.
  • R 23 is Ci-6 alkyl, wherein Ci-6 alkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups.
  • R 23 is Ci-6 alkyl, wherein Ci-6 alkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups, wherein each R 20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, amino, Ci-salkyl, Ci-salkoxy, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, carbamyl, and carbamoyl.
  • R 23 is C1-6 alkyl, wherein C1-6 alkyl is substituted with 1 , 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups, wherein each R 20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, and Ci-salkoxy.
  • R 23 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkenyl. In some embodiments, R 23 is C1-6 alkenyl, wherein C1-6 alkenyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups.
  • R 23 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-e alkynyl. In some embodiments, R 23 is Ci-e alkynyl, wherein Ci-e alkynyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups.
  • R 23 is CH2CHNH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 23 is CH2CHNH2CH2CH3. In some embodiments, R 23 is CH2CHNH2CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 23 is CH2CHNH2CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R 23 is CH2CHNH2CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R 23 is CH2CHNH2CH2CH(CH3)2. In some embodiments, R 23 is CH2CHNH2CHFCH3. In some embodiments, R 23 is CH2CHNH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R 23 is CH2CHNH2CH2OCH3. In some embodiments, R 23 is CH2CHNH2CH2OCD3.
  • R 23 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 heteroalkyl.
  • R 23 is C1-6 heteroalkyl, wherein the C1-6 heteroalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups.
  • R 23 is C1-6 heteroalkyl, wherein the C1-6 heteroalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups, wherein each R 20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, amino, Cualkyl, Ci-salkoxy, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, carbamyl, and carbamoyl.
  • R 23 is C1-6 heteroalkyl, wherein the C1-6 heteroalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups, wherein each R 20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, and Ci ⁇ alkoxy.
  • R 23 is C1-6 alkyl, wherein C1-6 alkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups, wherein each R 20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, amino, and Ci-salkoxy.
  • R 23 is substituted or unsubstituted -(C1-6 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl.
  • R 23 is -(C1-6 alkylene) -C3- 10 cycloalkyl, wherein -(C1-6 alkylene) -C3- 10 cycloalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups.
  • the Cn e alkylene is C1-3 alkylene.
  • the C1-6 alkylene is CH2.
  • the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 3-6 membered ring.
  • the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 3 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 5 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is
  • R 23 is substituted or unsubstituted -(C1-6 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • R 23 is -(C1-6 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein -(C1-6 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups.
  • the C1-6 alkylene is C1-3 alkylene.
  • the C1-6 alkylene is CH2.
  • the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4-6 membered ring.
  • the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 5 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl contains 0-1 oxygen and 0-2 nitrogen atoms. In some embodiments, the
  • R 23 is substituted or unsubstituted -(Ci-6 heteroalkylene)-C3- io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 23 is -(Ci-6 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, wherein -(Ci- e heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups. In some embodiments, the heteroalkylene is C 1.3 heteroalkylene. In some embodiments, the C3-
  • cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 3-6 membered ring.
  • the C3-aminoethyl is an optionally substituted 3-6 membered ring.
  • the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 3 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 5 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the heteroalkylene is C1-3 heteroalkylene. In some
  • R 23 is substituted or unsubstituted -(C1-6 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • R 23 is -(C1-6 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein -(C1-6 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R 20 groups.
  • the heteroalkylene is C1-3 heteroalkylene.
  • the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4-6 membered ring.
  • the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4 membered ring.
  • the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 5 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl contains 0-1 oxygen and 0-2 nitrogen atoms. In some embodiments, the embodiments, R 23 is any one selected from the group consisting some embodiments, some embodiments, R 23 is
  • each R 20 is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Ci- 4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, Ci- 4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)car
  • each R 20 is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1.4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, Ci- 4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, C1.4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, and amidinyl.
  • each R 20 is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1-4 alkyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, carbamyl C1.4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, and amidinyl.
  • R 20 is OH.
  • R 20 is NH2.
  • R 20 is SH.
  • R 20 is CN.
  • R 20 is F.
  • R 20 is carbamyl.
  • R 24 is selected from the group consisting of halo, CN, and substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl.
  • R 24 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, OH, halo, CN, substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkoxyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-10 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-4 alkenyl, and substituted or unsubstituted C2-4 alkynyl.
  • each R a3 , R b3 , R c3 , R d3 , R a4 , R b4 , R c4 , and R d4 is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 hydroxyalkyl, and C1-6 haloalkyl. In some embodiments, each R a3 , R b3 , R c3 , R d3 , R a4 , R b4 , R c4 , and R d4 , is independently selected from the group consisting of H and C1-6 alkyl.
  • each R a3 , R b3 , R c3 , R d3 , R a4 , R b4 , R c4 , and R d4 is independently selected from the group consisting of H and C1-3 alkyl. In some embodiments, each R a3 ,
  • R b3 , R c3 , R d3 , R a4 , R b4 , R c4 , and R d4 is hydrogen.
  • the compound is of the Formula (Ila): wherein
  • R 21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I); each R 20a , R 20b , and R 20c is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1.4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, Ci-
  • heteroalkylene -C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, amidinyl, amino, C1.4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-
  • each R 20a , R 20b , and R 20c is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1.4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, Ci-
  • R 20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10
  • the C3-10 cycloalkyl is a 3-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R 20a is Ci- 4 heteroalkyl.
  • the compound is of the Formula (lib) :
  • R 21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
  • R 20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1-4 alkyl, C2- 4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)- (C1-4 alkoxy), -(C1-4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1-4 heteroalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Ci-
  • each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino,
  • R 20a is selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1-4 alkyl, C2- 4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1.4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)- (C1-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbam
  • R 20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH( 013)2. In some embodiments, R 20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci- 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • R 20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is a 3-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted Cn 4 alkyl.
  • the compound is of the Formula (Illa):
  • R 21 and R 24 each has the meaning defined in Formula (I); each R 20a , R 20b , and R 20c is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1.4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, Cn
  • heteroalkylene -C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, amidinyl, amino, C1.4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, Cn 4 alkylcarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci.
  • each R 20a , R 20b , and R 20c is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cn 4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, Cn 4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl,
  • R 20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH(CH3)2. In some embodiments, R 20c is NH2. In some embodiments, R 20b is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-
  • R 20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R 20a is Ci-4heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1.4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted C1-4 alkyl.
  • the compound is of the Formula (Illb):
  • R 21 and R 24 each has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
  • R 20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
  • each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino,
  • R 20a is selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, Ci-
  • R 20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH(CH3)2. In some embodiments, R 20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci- 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • R 20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl.
  • R 20a is optionally substituted Ci- 4 alkyl.
  • R 24 is Ci-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 24 is methyl. In some embodiments, R 24 is halo. In some embodiments, R 24 is fluoro, bromo, or chloro. In some embodiments, R 24 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R 24 is CN. In some embodiments, R 24 is C3-10 cycloalkyl.
  • the compound is of the Formula (IIIc): wherein
  • R 21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
  • R 20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
  • each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino,
  • R 20a is selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, Ci-
  • R 20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH( CFF ⁇ . In some embodiments, R 20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Cn 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • R 20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted Cn 4 alkyl.
  • the compound is of the Formula (Illd):
  • R 20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
  • each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino,
  • R 20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R 20a is C ⁇ C HICH,):. In some embodiments, R 20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci- 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • R 20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted Ci- 4 alkyl.
  • the compound is of the Formula (Ille): wherein
  • R 21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
  • R 20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
  • each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino,
  • R 20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R 20a is C ⁇ CHiCH,):. In some embodiments, R 20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci- 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • R 20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is a 3-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R 20a is Ci-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is Ci-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted Ci- 4 alkyl.
  • the compound is of the Formula (Ulf) :
  • R 21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
  • R 20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
  • each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino,
  • R 20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R 20a is C ⁇ CHICH,):. In some embodiments, R 20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Cn 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • R 20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted C 1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted Ci- 4 alkyl.
  • the compound is of the Formula (Illg):
  • R 21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
  • R 20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
  • each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino,
  • R 20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R 20a is CH2CH( 013)2. In some embodiments, R 20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci- 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • R 20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R 20a is optionally substituted Cn 4 alkyl.
  • the compound is selected from Table 1.
  • a SMSM described herein possesses one or more stereocenters and each stereocenter exists independently in either the R or S configuration.
  • the compounds presented herein include all diastereomeric, enantiomeric, and epimeric forms as well as the appropriate mixtures thereof.
  • the compounds and methods provided herein include all cis, trans, syn, anti,
  • E
  • Z
  • compounds described herein are prepared as their individual stereoisomers by reacting a racemic mixture of the compound with an optically active resolving agent to form a pair of diastereoisomeric compounds/salts, separating the diastereomers and recovering the optically pure enantiomers.
  • resolution of enantiomers is carried out using covalent diastereomeric derivatives of the compounds described herein.
  • diastereomers are separated by separation/re solution techniques based upon differences in solubility.
  • separation of stereoisomers is performed by chromatography or by the forming diastereomeric salts and separation by recrystallization, or chromatography, or any combination thereof (See, for example, Jean Jacques, Andre Collet, Samuel H. Wilen, “Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1981.)
  • stereoisomers are obtained by stereoselective synthesis.
  • prodrugs refers to an agent that is converted into the parent drug in vivo. Prodrugs are often useful because, in some situations, they may be easier to administer than the parent drug. They may, for instance, be bioavailable by oral administration whereas the parent is not. The prodrug may also have improved solubility in pharmaceutical compositions over the parent drug. In some embodiments, the design of a prodrug increases the effective water solubility.
  • a prodrug is a compound described herein, which is administered as an ester (the “prodrug”) to facilitate transmittal across a cell membrane where water solubility is detrimental to mobility, but which then is metabolically hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid, the active entity, once inside the cell where watersolubility is beneficial.
  • a further example of a prodrug might be a short peptide (polyaminoacid) bonded to an acid group where the peptide is metabolized to reveal the active moiety.
  • a prodrug upon in vivo administration, a prodrug is chemically converted to the biologically, pharmaceutically or therapeutically active form of the compound.
  • a prodrug is enzymatically metabolized by one or more steps or processes to the biologically, pharmaceutically or therapeutically active form of the compound.
  • prodrugs are designed to alter the metabolic stability or the transport characteristics of a drug, to mask side effects or toxicity, to improve the flavor of a drug or to alter other characteristics or properties of a drug.
  • the design of prodrugs of the compound is possible, (see, for example, Nogrady (1985) Medicinal Chemistry A Biochemical Approach, Oxford University Press, New York, pages 388-392; Silverman (1992), The Organic Chemistry of Drug Design and Drug Action, Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, pages 352-401, Rooseboom et al., Pharmacological Reviews, 56:53-102, 2004; Aesop Cho, “Recent Advances in Oral Prodrug Discovery”, Annual Reports in Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 41, 395-407, 2006; T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, Vol. 14 of the A.
  • some of the herein-described compounds may be a prodrug for another derivative or active compound.
  • sites on the aromatic ring portion of compounds described herein are susceptible to various metabolic reactions Therefore incorporation of appropriate substituents on the aromatic ring structures will reduce, minimize or eliminate this metabolic pathway.
  • the appropriate substituent to decrease or eliminate the susceptibility of the aromatic ring to metabolic reactions is, by way of example only, a halogen, or an alkyl group.
  • the compounds described herein are labeled isotopically (e.g. with a radioisotope) or by other means, including, but not limited to, the use of chromophores or fluorescent moieties, bioluminescent labels, or chemiluminescent labels.
  • Compounds described herein include isotopically labeled compounds, which are identical to those recited in the various formulae and structures presented herein, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be incorporated into the present compounds include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, fluorine and chlorine, such as, for example, 2 H, 3 H, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 18 O, 17 O, 35 S, 18 F, and 36 C1.
  • isotopically labeled compounds described herein for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as 3 H and 14 C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution assays.
  • substitution with isotopes such as deuterium affords certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, such as, for example, increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements.
  • the compounds described herein are metabolized upon administration to an organism in need to produce a metabolite that is then used to produce a desired effect, including a desired therapeutic effect.
  • compositions described herein may be formed as, and/or used as, pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • pharmaceutical acceptable salts include, but are not limited to: (1) acid addition salts, formed by reacting the free base form of the compound with a pharmaceutically acceptable: inorganic acid, such as, for example, hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, metaphosphoric acid, and the like; or with an organic acid, such as, for example, acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, trifluoroacetic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methane sulfonic acid, ethane sulfonic acid,
  • compounds described herein may coordinate with an organic base, such as, but not limited to, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, tromethamine, N-methylglucamine, dicyclohexylamine, tris(hydroxymethyl)methylamine.
  • compounds described herein may form salts with amino acids such as, but not limited to, arginine, lysine, and the like.
  • Acceptable inorganic bases used to form salts with compounds that include an acidic proton include, but are not limited to, aluminum hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, and the like.
  • a SMSM has a molecular weight of at most about 2000 Daltons, 1500 Daltons, 1000 Daltons or 900 Daltons. In some embodiments, a SMSM has a molecular weight of at least 100 Daltons, 200 Daltons, 300 Daltons, 400 Daltons or 500 Daltons. In some embodiments, a SMSM does not comprise a phosphodiester linkage. In some embodiments, a SMSM is a compound with a structure set forth in Table 1 below.
  • compositions are formulated into pharmaceutical compositions.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions are formulated in a conventional manner using one or more pharmaceutically acceptable inactive ingredients that facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations that can be used pharmaceutically. Proper formulation is dependent upon the route of administration chosen.
  • a summary of pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be found, for example, in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Nineteenth Ed (Easton, Pa.: Mack Publishing Company, 1995); Hoover, John E., Remington’s Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pennsylvania 1975; Liberman, H.A.
  • a pharmaceutical composition can be a mixture of a SMSM described herein with one or more other chemical components (i. e. , pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients), such as carriers, excipients, binders, fdling agents, suspending agents, flavoring agents, sweetening agents, disintegrating agents, dispersing agents, surfactants, lubricants, colorants, diluents, solubilizers, moistening agents, plasticizers, stabilizers, penetration enhancers, wetting agents, anti-foaming agents, antioxidants, preservatives, or one or more combination thereof.
  • the pharmaceutical composition facilitates administration of the compound to an organism.
  • compositions described herein can be administered to the subject in a variety of ways, including parenterally, intravenously, intradermally, intramuscularly, colonically, rectally, or intraperitoneally.
  • the small molecule splicing modulator, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered by intraperitoneal injection, intramuscular injection, subcutaneous injection, or intravenous injection of the subject.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can be administered parenterally, intravenously, intramuscularly or orally.
  • the oral agents comprising a small molecule splicing modulator can be in any suitable form for oral administration, such as liquid, tablets, capsules, or the like.
  • the oral formulations can be further coated or treated to prevent or reduce dissolution in stomach.
  • compositions of the present disclosure can be administered to a subject using any suitable methods known in the art. Suitable formulations for use in the present disclosure and methods of delivery are generally well known in the art.
  • the small molecule splicing modulators described herein can be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent, carrier, or excipient.
  • the compositions may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions including pH adjusting and buffering agents, tonicity adjusting agents, wetting agents and the like, such as, for example, sodium acetate, sodium lactate, sodium chloride, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate, etc.
  • the pharmaceutical formulation is in the form of a tablet.
  • pharmaceutical formulations containing a SMSM described herein are in the form of a capsule.
  • liquid formulation dosage forms for oral administration are in the form of aqueous suspensions or solutions selected from the group including, but not limited to, aqueous oral dispersions, emulsions, solutions, elixirs, gels, and syrups.
  • a SMSM described herein can be formulated for use as an aerosol, a mist, or a powder.
  • the compositions may take the form of tablets, lozenges, or gels formulated in a conventional manner.
  • a SMSM described herein can be prepared as transdermal dosage forms.
  • a SMSM described herein can be formulated into a pharmaceutical composition suitable for intramuscular, subcutaneous, or intravenous injection.
  • a SMSM described herein can be administered topically and can be formulated into a variety of topically administrable compositions, such as solutions, suspensions, lotions, gels, pastes, medicated sticks, balms, creams, or ointments.
  • a SMSM described herein can be formulated in rectal compositions such as enemas, rectal gels, rectal foams, rectal aerosols, suppositories, jelly suppositories, or retention enemas.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the disclosure or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
  • the present disclosure contemplates use of small molecules with favorable drug properties that modulate the activity of splicing of a target RNA.
  • SMSMs small molecule splicing modulators
  • the SMSMs bind and modulate target RNA.
  • a library of SMSMs that bind and modulate one or more target RNAs.
  • the target RNA is mRNA.
  • the target RNA is a noncoding RNA.
  • the target RNA is a pre-mRNA.
  • the target RNA is hnRNA.
  • the small molecules modulate splicing of the target RNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates splicing at a sequence of the target RNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates splicing at a cryptic splice site sequence of the target RNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates splicing at an alternative splice site sequence of the target RNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates splicing at a native splice site sequence of the target RNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein binds to a target RNA.
  • a small molecule provided herein binds to a splicing complex or a component thereof. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein binds to a target RNA and a splicing complex or a component thereof. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates binding affinity of a splicing complex component to a target RNA such as a pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates binding affinity of a splicing complex component to a target RNA such as a pre-mRNA at a splice site sequence. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates binding affinity of a splicing complex component to a target RNA such as a pre-mRNA upstream of a splice site sequence or downstream of a splice site sequence.
  • Described herein are compounds modifying splicing of gene products, such as Ataxin 3 pre- mRNA for use in the treatment, prevention, and/or delay of progression of diseases or conditions.
  • a method of treating, preventing, delaying of progress, or ameliorating symptoms of a disease or a condition associated with Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) expression level or activity level in a subject in need thereof comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a small molecule splicing modulator (SMSM), wherein the SMSM binds to a pre-mRNA encoded by ATXN3 and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of the subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA.
  • SMSM small molecule splicing modulator
  • described herein is a method of treating, preventing, delaying of progress, or ameliorating symptoms of a disease or a condition associated with Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) expression level or activity level in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or salt of Formula (I).
  • Ataxin 3 Ataxin 3
  • described herein is a method of modulating splicing of a Ataxin3 (ATXN3) pre-mRNA, comprising contacting a compound or salt of Formula (I) to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA with a splice site sequence or cells comprising the ATXN3 pre-mRNA, wherein the compound binds to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of a subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA.
  • described herein is use of a compound of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a condition or disease associated with Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) expression level or activity level.
  • the spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA undergoes non-sense mediated decay (NMD) and/or nuclear retention.
  • the nonsense-mediated decay (NMD) and/or nuclear retention of the spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA is promoted.
  • the nonsense -mediated decay (NMD) and/or nuclear retention of the spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA is increased compared to a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre- mRNA produced in the absence of the SMSM.
  • a method of modulating splicing of a Ataxin3 (ATXN3) pre-mRNA comprising contacting a small molecule splicing modulator (SMSM) to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA with a splice site sequence or cells comprising the ATXN3 pre-mRNA, wherein the SMSM binds to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of a subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA.
  • SMSM small molecule splicing modulator
  • a method of modulating splicing of Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) pre-mRNA comprising contacting a small molecule splicing modulator (SMSM) to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA with a splice site sequence or cells comprising the ATXN3 pre-mRNA, wherein the SMSM binds to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of a subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA, wherein the splice site sequence comprises UCCUAU/guaagauucugu.
  • SMSM small molecule splicing modulator
  • a method of treating, preventing, delaying of progress, or ameliorating symptoms of a disease or condition associated with Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) expression level or activity level in a subject in need thereof comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a small molecule splicing modulator (SMSM) to the subject, wherein the SMSM binds to a ATXN3 pre-mRNA with a splice site sequence and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of the subject, wherein a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre- mRNA undergoes nonsense -mediated decay (NMD), and wherein the splice site sequence comprises UCCUAU/guaagauucugu.
  • SMSM small molecule splicing modulator
  • the modulating splicing comprises modulating alternative splicing. In some embodiments, the modulating splicing comprises promoting exon skipping. In some embodiments, the modulating splicing comprises promoting exon inclusion. In some embodiments, the modulating splicing comprises modulating nonsense-mediated mRNA decay (NMD). In some embodiments, the modulating NMD comprises promoting NMD. In some embodiments, the modulating splicing comprises modulating nuclear retention of the spliced product of the pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, the modulating intron retention comprises promoting nuclear retention of the spliced product of the pre-mRNA.
  • the splice site sequence is a native splice site sequence.
  • the native splice site is a canonical splice site.
  • the native splice site is an alternative splice site.
  • the alternative splice site comprises a 5’ splice site sequence.
  • the alternative splice site sequence comprises UCCUAU/guaagauucugu.
  • the SMSM induces splicing at the alternative splice site.
  • the splicing at the alternative splice site results in a frameshift in a downstream exon in the spliced product.
  • the downstream exon comprises an in-frame stop codon that is not in frame in the absence of splicing at the alternative splice site.
  • the in-frame stop codon in the downstream exon is at least 50 or at least 60 base pairs upstream of the 3’ end of the downstream exon.
  • the in-frame stop codon in the downstream exon is at least 50 or at least 60 base pairs upstream of a final exon-exon junction.
  • the splicing of the pre-mRNA at the alternative splice site promotes NMD of the spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA.
  • the spliced product comprises an alternative exon.
  • the SMSM promotes inclusion of the alternative exon in the spliced product.
  • the alternative exon comprises a poison exon.
  • the SMSM promotes inclusion of the poison exon in the spliced product.
  • the poison exon comprises an in-frame stop codon.
  • the in-frame stop codon is a premature termination codon.
  • the in-frame stop codon is at least 50 or 60 base pairs upstream of the 3’ end of the poison exon.
  • the inframe stop codon is less than 60 base pairs upstream of the 3 ’ end of the poison exon and wherein the exon immediately downstream of the poison exon is not the last exon in the pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, the sum of (a) the number of base pairs in the exon immediately downstream of the poison exon and (b) the number of base pairs between the premature termination codon in the poison exon and the 3’ end of the poison exon is at least 50 or at least 60.
  • the cells comprise primary cells. In some embodiments, the cells comprise disease cells. In some embodiments, the SMSM modulates proliferation or survival of the cells. In some embodiments, the SMSM modulates the expression level of a protein encoded by the spliced product of the pre-mRNA in the cells.
  • compositions and methods described herein can be used for treating a human disease or disorder associated with aberrant splicing, such as aberrant pre-mRNA splicing.
  • the compositions and methods described herein can be used for treating a human disease or disorder by modulating mRNA, such as pre-mRNA.
  • the compositions and methods described herein can be used for treating a human disease or disorder by modulating splicing of a nucleic acid even when that nucleic acid is not aberrantly spliced in the pathogenesis of the disease or disorder being treated.
  • an effective amount in the context of the administration of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or composition or medicament thereof refers to an amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to a patient which has a therapeutic effect and/or beneficial effect.
  • an effective amount in the context of the administration of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or composition or medicament thereof to a patient results in one, two or more of the following effects: (i) reduces or ameliorates the severity of a disease; (ii) delays onset of a disease; (iii) inhibits the progression of a disease; (iv) reduces hospitalization of a subject; (v) reduces hospitalization length for a subject; (vi) increases the survival of a subject; (vii) improves the quality of life of a subject; (viii) reduces the number of symptoms associated with a disease; (ix) reduces or ameliorates the severity of a symptom associated with a disease; (x) reduces the duration of a symptom associated with a disease associated; (xi) prevents the recurrence of a symptom associated with a disease; (xii) inhibits the development or onset of a symptom of a disease; and/or (xiii) inhibits of
  • an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to restore the amount of an RNA transcript of a gene to the amount of the RNA transcript detectable in healthy patients or cells from healthy patients.
  • an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to restore the amount an RNA isoform and/or protein isoform of a gene to the amount of the RNA isoform and/or protein isoform detectable in healthy patients or cells from healthy patients.
  • an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to decrease the aberrant amount of an RNA transcript of a gene which associated with a disease. In some embodiments, an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to decrease the amount of the aberrant expression of an isoform of a gene. In some embodiments, an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to result in a substantial change in the amount of an RNA transcript (e.g., an mRNA transcript), alternative splice variant, or isoform.
  • an RNA transcript e.g., an mRNA transcript
  • an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to increase the amount of an RNA transcript (e.g. , an mRNA transcript) of a gene that is beneficial for the prevention and/or treatment of a disease.
  • an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to increase the amount of an alternative splice variant of an RNA transcript of a gene that is beneficial for the prevention and/or treatment of a disease.
  • an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to increase the amount of an isoform of a gene that is beneficial for the prevention and/or treatment of a disease.
  • an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to decrease the amount of an RNA transcript (e.g. , an mRNA transcript) which causes or is related to the symptoms of the condition or disease.
  • the SMSM decreases the amount of an RNA transcript that causes or relates to the symptoms of the condition or disease by modulating one or more splicing elements of the RNA transcript.
  • the SMSM promotes skipping of one or more exons.
  • the SMSM promotes inclusion of one or more exons.
  • the SMSM promotes inclusion of one or more exons and/or introns that relate to nonsense-mediated mRNA decay (NMD).
  • the one or more exons harbor a premature termination codon.
  • the premature stop codon is an in-frame codon that does not cause frameshift of the downstream exon(s).
  • inclusion of the one or more exons causes a reading frameshift in a downstream exon, for example, in the immediately downstream exon, introducing a premature termination codon.
  • a method of treating a disease or a condition in a subject in need thereof can comprise administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound described herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • the present disclosure relates to a method for the treatment, prevention and/or delay of progression of a disease or a condition associated with a gene listed in Table 2.
  • Non-limiting examples of effective amounts of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are described herein.
  • the effective amount may be the amount required to prevent and/or treat a disease associated with the aberrant amount of an mRNA transcript of gene in a human subject.
  • the effective amount will be in a range of from about 0.001 mg/kg/day to about 500 mg/kg/day for a patient having a weight in a range of between about 1 kg to about 200 kg.
  • the typical adult subject is expected to have a median weight in a range of between about 70 and about 100 kg.
  • a SMSM described herein can be used in the preparation of medicaments for the treatment of diseases or conditions described herein.
  • a method for treating any of the diseases or conditions described herein in a subject in need of such treatment can involve administration of pharmaceutical compositions that include at least one SMSM described herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof, in a therapeutically effective amount to a subject.
  • a SMSM described herein can be administered for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatments.
  • the compositions are administered to a patient already suffering from a disease or a condition, in an amount sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest at least one of the symptoms of the disease or the condition.
  • compositions containing a SMSM described herein can be administered to a patient susceptible to or otherwise at risk of a particular disease, disorder, or condition.
  • compositions described herein can be administered to the subject in a variety of ways, including parenterally, intravenously, intradermally, intramuscularly, colonically, rectally or intraperitoneally.
  • the small molecule splicing modulator (SMSM) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered by intraperitoneal injection, intramuscular injection, subcutaneous injection, or intravenous injection of the subject.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions can be administered parenterally, intravenously, intramuscularly or orally.
  • the oral agents comprising a small molecule splicing modulator can be in any suitable form for oral administration, such as liquid, tablets, capsules, or the like.
  • compositions of the present disclosure can be administered to a subject using any suitable methods known in the art. Suitable formulations for use in the present disclosure and methods of delivery are generally well known in the art.
  • the small molecule splicing modulators described herein can be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent, carrier, or excipient.
  • the SMSMs utilized in the methods of the disclosure can be, e.g., administered at dosages that may be varied depending upon the requirements of the subject, the severity of the condition being treated and/or imaged, and/or the SMSM being employed.
  • dosages can be empirically determined considering the type and stage of disease diagnosed in a particular subject and/or the type of imaging modality being used in conjunction with the SMSMs.
  • the dose administered to a subject, in the context of the present disclosure should be sufficient to affect a beneficial diagnostic or therapeutic response in the subject.
  • the size of the dose also can be determined by the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects that accompany the administration of a SMSM in a particular subject.
  • the effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof for use in the manufacture of a medicament, the preparation of a pharmaceutical kit or in a method for preventing and/or treating a disease in a human subject in need thereof is intended to include an amount in a range of from about 1 pg to about 50 grams.
  • the compositions of the present disclosure can be administered as frequently as necessary. Subjects
  • the subjects that can be treated with the SMSMs and methods described herein can be any subject that produces mRNA that is subject to alternative splicing, e.g., the subject may be a eukaryotic subject, such as a plant or an animal.
  • the subject is a mammal, e.g. , human.
  • the subject is a human.
  • the subject is a nonhuman animal.
  • the subject is a fetus, an embryo, or a child.
  • the subject is a non-human primate such as chimpanzee, and other apes and monkey species; farm animals such as cattle, horses, sheep, goats, swine; domestic animals such as rabbits, dogs, and cats; laboratory animals including rodents, such as rats, mice and guinea pigs, and the like.
  • the subject is prenatal (e.g. , a fetus), a child (e.g. , a neonate, an infant, a toddler, a preadolescent), an adolescent, a pubescent, or an adult (e.g. , an early adult, a middle-aged adult, a senior citizen).
  • Compounds described herein can be synthesized using standard synthetic techniques or using methods known in the art in combination with methods described herein. Unless otherwise indicated, conventional methods of mass spectroscopy, NMR, HPLC, protein chemistry, biochemistry, recombinant DNA techniques and pharmacology can be employed. Compounds can be prepared using standard organic chemistry techniques such as those described in, for example, March’s Advanced Organic Chemistry, 6th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc. Alternative reaction conditions for the synthetic transformations described herein may be employed such as variation of solvent, reaction temperature, reaction time, as well as different chemical reagents and other reaction conditions. The starting materials can be available from commercial sources or can be readily prepared.
  • SMSMs can be made using known techniques and further chemically modified, in some embodiments, to facilitate intranuclear transfer to, e.g., a splicing complex component, a spliceosome or a pre-mRNA molecule.
  • a splicing complex component e.g., a splicing complex component
  • a spliceosome e.g., a pre-mRNA molecule.
  • pre-mRNA molecule e.g., a pre-mRNA molecule.
  • standard medicinal chemistry approaches for chemical modifications for intranuclear transfer e.g., reducing charge, optimizing size, and/or modifying lipophilicity.
  • Step l Into a 500-mL round bottom flask purged and maintained with an inert atmosphere of nitrogen were added ethyl 5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2 -carboxylate (20 g, 130.5 mmol, 1 eq.), NBS (23.2 g, 130.5 mmol, 1 eq.) and DCM (200 mL) at 0°C. The resulting solution was stirred for 2h at RT. The resulting mixture was extracted with DCM (3 x 300 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (3x300 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by trituration with MeOH (100 mL) to afford ethyl 4-bromo-5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2-carboxylate (20 g, 66%) as a white solid.
  • Step 2 A solution of ethyl 4-bromo-5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2-carboxylate (20 g, 86.2 mmol, 1 eq.) in THF (200 ml) was treated with sodium hydride (4.14 g, 172.4 mmol, 2 eq.) for 2 h at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere followed by the addition of O-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)hydroxylamine (25.74 g, 129.3 mmol, 1.5 eq.) in portions at RT. The resulting mixture was stirred for 2h at RT. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2x100 mL). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step 3 A solution of ethyl l-amino-4-bromo-5-methylpyrrole-2 -carboxylate (13.5 g, 54.65 mmol, 1 eq.) and ethyl 3-chloro-3-oxopropanoate (9.87 g, 65.5 mmol, 1.2 eq.), pyridine (8.64 g, 109.3 mmol, 2 eq.) in DCM (200 ml) was stirred for 2h at RT. The aqueous layer was extracted with DCM (2x100 mL). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step 4 A solution of ethyl 4-bromo-l-(3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanamido)-5-methylpyrrole-2- carboxylate (7.5 g, 20.7 mmol, 1 equiv) and t-BuOK (4.66 g, 41.5 mmol, 2 equiv) in THF (lOOmL) was stirred for 4h at room temperature. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The resulting mixture containing ethyl 6-bromo-7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-3- carboxylate was used in the next step directly without further purification.
  • Step 5 A solution of ethyl 6-bromo-7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-3- carboxylate (5 g, 15.8 mmol, 1 eq.) and NaOH (3.173 g, 79 mmol, 5 eq.) in 1,4-dioxane : water (1: 1) (lOOmL) was stirred for 16h at 80°C. The mixture was acidified to pH 7 with cone. HC1. The precipitated solids were collected by filtration.
  • Step 6 A solution of 6-bromo-7-methyl-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-2, 4-dione (2.8 g, 11.5 mmol, 1 eq.) and DIEA (2.9g, 23.0 mmol, 2 eq.) in POCE (30mL) was stirred for 3 days at 125°C. The mixture was acidified to pH 7 with cone. HC1. The precipitated solids were collected by filtration. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography (column, Cl 8; mobile phase, MeCN in Water (0.
  • Step 7 A solution of 6-bromo-2,4-dichloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (200 mg, 0.714 mmol, 1 eq.) and l-(thiophen-2-yl)methanamine (82.5 mg, 0.728 mmol, 1.02 eq.), DIEA (185 mg, 1.428 mmol, 2 eq.) in DMSO (3mL) was stirred for 8h at 100°C.
  • Step 8 A solution of 6-bromo-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2- b]pyridazin-4-amine (160 mg, 0.449 mmol, 1 eq.) and BOC2O (196 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 eq.), DMAP (109 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 eq.), TEA (91 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 eq.) in DCM (3ml) was stirred for 2h at RT. The resulting mixture was diluted with water (20mL). The resulting mixture was extracted with CH2CI2 (2 x 20mL).
  • Step l To a stirred mixture of 6-bromo-2,4-dichloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (compound obtained in the course of the preparation of the intermediate 8-2) (200 mg, 0.752 mmol, 1 eq.) in TFA (5 mb) was added NCS (120 mg, 0.902 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in portions at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for lOmin at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was diluted with CH2CI2 (10 mL). The reaction was quenched by the addition of water (20mL) at 0°C.
  • Step 2 To a stirred solution of 6-bromo-2,4,7-trichloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (200 mg, 0.666 mmol, 1 eq.) and l-(thiophen-2-yl)methanamine (90 mg, 0.799 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in DMSO (10 mL) was added DIEA (172 mg, 1.332 mmol, 2 eq.) dropwise at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 5h at 100°C under air atmosphere. The mixture was allowed to cool down to RT.
  • Step 3 To a stirred solution of 6-bromo-2,7-dichloro-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2- b]pyridazin-4-amine (400 mg, 1.061 mmol, 1 eq.) in DCM (10 mL, 157 mmol, 148 eq.) was added DMAP (12.9 mg, 0.106 mmol, 0.1 eq.) and di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (347 mg, 1.591 mmol, 1.5 eq.) in portions at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 3h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step l To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-hydroxypropan-2-yl]carbamate (10 g, 57.07 mmol, 1 eq.) and triphenylphosphine (18.01 g, 64.48 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in THF (100 mb) and DCM (100 mb) was added NBS (12.19 g, 68.48 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in portions at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at RT under nitrogen atmosphere. The residue was diluted with DCM (200 mb) and washed with water (2x100 mb).
  • Step 2 A mixture of tert-butyl N-(l-bromopropan-2-yl)carbamate (4 g, 16.80 mmol, 1 eq.), copper(I) iodide (0.32 g, 1.68 mmol, 0.1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (0.44 g, 1.68 mmol, 0.13 eq.), 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-l,3,2-dioxaborolane (5.55 g, 21.84 mmol, 1.3 eq.) and methoxylithium (0.83 g, 21.84 mmol, 1.3 eq.) in dimethylformamide (80 mb) was stirred for 16 h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was diluted with water (200mL) and extracted with tert-Butyl methyl
  • Step 3 To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[l-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2- yl)propan-2-yl] carbamate (4 g, 14.03 mmol, 1 eq.) in with tert-Butyl methyl ether (40 mL) was added KHF2 (2.19 g, 28.05 mmol, 2 eq.) and water (1 mL) at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight and the resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was diluted with tert-Butyl methyl ether (100 mL). The mixture was stirred for 30 min and filtered.
  • Step 2 To a stirred solution of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-hydroxy-3-methoxypropan-2- yl]carbamate (2.5 g, 12.180 mmol, 1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (5.91 g, 22.53 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in THF (8 mb) and DCM (40 mb) were added NBS (4.01 g, 22.53 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in portions at -20°C under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for additional overnight at RT. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum.
  • Step 3 A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-bromo-3-methoxypropan-2-yl]carbamate (1.2 g, 4.47 mmol, 1 eq.) copper(I) iodide (0.09 g, 0.448 mmol, 0.1 eq.) methoxylithium (0.34 g, 8.950 mmol, 2 eq.) triphenylphosphine (0.15 g, 0.582 mmol, 0.13 eq.) and 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5- tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-l,3,2-dioxaborolane (1.71 mb, 5.817 mmol, 1.3 equiv) in DMF (11 mb) was stirred for overnight at RT under air atmosphere.
  • Step 4 A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-methoxy-3-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)propan-2-yl]carbamate (1.2 g, 3.807 mmol, 1 eq.) and KHF2 (0.59 g, 7.614 mmol, 2 eq.) in 2-methoxy-2 -methylpropane (100 mb) was stirred for overnight at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by trituration with MTBE (300 mb). The mixture was stirred for 30 min and filtered.
  • Borate salt 3 Potassium ((2R,3S)-2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3- fluorobutyl)trifluoroborate
  • Step 1 To a stirred solution of imidazole (144.76 g, 2126.348 mmol, 4 equiv) in DCM (3720 mL) were added SOCI2 (57.84 mL, 797.38 mmol, 1.5 equiv) and DIEA (185.19 mL, 1063.17 mmol, 2 eq.) dropwise at 0°C. The resulting mixture was stirred for 0.5h at OoC.
  • Step 2 A solution of 3 -(tert-butyl) 4-methyl (4S,5R)-5-methyl-l,2,3-oxathiazolidine-3,4- dicarboxylate 2-oxide (144 g, 515.55 mmol, 1 eq.) in H2O (1008 mL) and acetonitrile (1872 mL) was treated withNalCL (132.33 g, 618.66 mmol, 1.2 eq.) and ruthenium(iv) oxide hydrate (1.56 g, 10.31 mmol, 0.02 eq.) at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for Ih at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere.
  • Step 3 A solution of 3 -(tert-butyl) 4-methyl (4S,5R)-5-methyl-l,2,3-oxathiazolidine-3,4- dicarboxylate 2,2-dioxide (144 g, 487.62 mmol, 1 eq.) in THE (975 mL) was treated with EtsN.sHF (430.11 mL, 3169.55 mmol, 6.5 eq.) at 60°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 3 days at 60°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The mixture was neutralized to pH 7 withNaOH (20%). The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 800 mL). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • EtsN.sHF 430.11 mL, 3169.55 mmol, 6.5 eq.
  • Step 4 A solution of methyl (2R,3S)-2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-fluorobutanoate (55 g, 233.79 mmol, 1 eq.) in EtOH (500 mL) was treated withNaBEL (22.11 g, 584.47 mmol, 2.5 eq.) at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at
  • Step 5 To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R,3S)-3-fluoro-l-hydroxybutan-2- yl]carbamate (44 g, 212.31 mmol, 1 eq.) and triphenylphosphine (103.02 g, 392.77 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in THF (170 mb) and DCM (880 mb) was added NBS (69.91 g, 392.77 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in portions at - 20°C under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at RT under air atmosphere.
  • Step 6 A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2S,3S)-l-bromo-3-fluorobutan-2-yl]carbamate (15.2 g, 56.27 mmol, 1 eq.), copper(I) iodide (1.07 g, 5.63 mmol, 0.1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (1.92 g, 7.31 mmol, 0.13 eq.), 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-l,3,2- dioxaborolane (18.57 g, 73.15 mmol, 1.3 eq.) and methoxylithium (4.27 g, 112.53 mmol, 2 eq.) in DMF (150 mb) was stirred for 16h at RT under air atmosphere.
  • the resulting mixture was diluted with water (500mb). The resulting mixture was filtered, the filter cake was washed with MTBE (1x100 mb). The resulting mixture was extracted with MTBE (3 x300 mb). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (2x100 mb), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting mixture was used in the next step directly without further purification.
  • Step 7 A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R,3S)-3-fluoro-l-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)butan-2-yl] carbamate (15.2 g, 47.92 mmol, 1 eq.) and KHF2 (8.8 g, 112.67 mmol, 2.35 eq.) in MTBE (600 mb) and H2O (4 mb) was stirred for 16h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by trituration with MTBE. The mixture was stirred for 30 min and filtered.
  • Step 2 A solution of tert-butyl (4R)-4-[(benzyloxy)methyl]-2-oxo-l,21ambda4,3- oxathiazolidine-3 -carboxylate (122 g, 372.63 mmol, 1 eq.) in H2O (854 mL) and acetonitrile (1586 mL) was treated with NaKL (95.64 g, 447.16 mmol, 1.2 eq.) and ruthenium(iv) oxide hydrate (1.13 g, 7.45 mmol, 0.02 eq.) at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for Ih at 0 °C.
  • Step 3 A solution oftert-butyl (4R)-4-[(benzyloxy)methyl]-2,2-dioxo-l,21ambda6,3- oxathiazolidine-3 -carboxylate (117 g, 340.72 mmol, 1 eq.) in THE (1725 mL) was treated with TBAF (340.72 mL, 340.720 mmol, 1 equiv) at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction was quenched by the addition of citric acid (10%) (1500 mL) at RT. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 1000 mL).
  • Step 4 A solution oftert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-(benzyloxy)-3-fluoropropan-2-yl]carbamate (76 g, 268.226 mmol, 1 equiv) in EtOAc (760 mL) was treated with Pd/C (15.2 g, 20%) at room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at 50°C under hydrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was filtered, the filter cake was washed with EtOAc (300 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step 5 To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-fluoro-3-hydroxypropan-2-yl]carbamate (10.5 g, 54.34 mmol, 1 eq.) and triphenylphosphine (17.15 g, 65.21 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in DCM (100 mL) and THF (100 mL) was added NBS (11.62 g, 65.28 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in portions at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature under nitrogen atmosphere. The residue was washed with water (2x50 mL) and brine (50 mL).
  • Step 6 A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-bromo-3-fluoropropan-2-yl]carbamate (3.5 g, 13.66 mmol, 1 eq.), copper(I) iodide (0.26 g, 1.37 mmol, 0.1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (0.36 g, 1.37 mmol, 0.1 eq.), Bis(pinacolato) diboron (6.94 g, 27.33 mmol, 2 eq.) and methoxylithium (1.04 g, 27.33 mmol, 2 eq.) in DMF (60 mb) was stirred for 16 h at RT under air atmosphere.
  • the resulting mixture was diluted with water (60 mb) and extracted with MTBE (3 x 100 mb). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (1x50 mb), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After fdtration, the fdtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was used in the next step directly without further purification.
  • Step 7 A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-fluoro-3-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan- 2-yl)propan-2-yl]carbamate (5 g, 16.49 mmol, 1 eq.) and fluorine potassium hydride (2.57 g, 32.98 mmol, 2 eq.) in MTBE (200 mL) and H2O (2 mL) was stirred for 16 h at room temperature under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was diluted with MTBE (200 mL). The mixture was stirred for 30 min and filtered.
  • Step 1 To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl (4R)-4-(hydroxymethyl)-2,2-dim ethyl- 1,3- oxazolidine-3 -carboxylate (11 g, 47.6 mmol, 1 eq.) and triphenylphosphine (23.08 g, 87.98 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in THF (44 mb) and DCM (220 mb) was added NBS (15.66 g, 87.98 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in portions at -20°C under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 16h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum.
  • Step 2 A mixture of tert-butyl (4S)-4-(bromomethyl)-2,2-dimethyl-l,3-oxazolidine-3- carboxylate (2.5 g, 8.50 mmol, 1 eq.), methoxylithium (0.65 g, 17.0 mmol, 2 eq.), copper(I) iodide (0.16 g, 0.85 mmol, 0.1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (0.29 g, 1.105 mmol, 0.13 eq.) and 4, 4,5,5- tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-l,3,2-dioxaborolane (2.81 g, 11.05 mmol, 1.3 eq.) in DMF (25 mb) was stirred overnight at RT under air atmosphere.
  • the resulting mixture was diluted with water (100 mL), filtered, and the filter cake was washed with MTBE (2x30 mL). The filtrate was extracted with MTBE (2 x 80 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (1x30 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was used in the next step directly without further purification.
  • Step 3 A mixture of tert-butyl (4R)-2,2-dimethyl-4-[(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)methyl]-l, 3 -oxazolidine-3 -carboxylate (2.5 g, 7.32 mmol, 1 eq.) and potassium bifluoride (1.14 g, 14.65 mmol, 2 eq.) in MTBE (250 mL) was stirred for overnight at room temperature under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by trituration with MTBE (100 mL). The mixture was stirred for 30 min and filtered.
  • Borate salt 6 Potassium (R)-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3- (difluoromethoxy)propyl)trifluoroborate
  • Step 1 To a stirred solution of tert-butyl (4S)-4-(hydroxymethyl)-2,2-dimethyl-l,3- oxazolidine-3 -carboxylate (20 g, 86.471 mmol, 1 equiv) in DCM (800 mL) and H2O (800 mL) was added (bromodifluoromethyl) trimethylsilane (52.69 g, 259.41 mmol, 3 eq.) and potassium acetate (50.92 g, 518.83 mmol, 6 eq.) in portions at 10°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 24h at RT under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step 2 To a stirred solution of tert-butyl (4R)-4-[(difluoromethoxy)methyl]-2,2-dimethyl- l,3-oxazolidine-3-carboxylate (1 g, 3.55 mmol, 1 eq.) in MeCN (20 mL) and was added bismuth tribromide (1.28 g, 2.84 mmol, 0.2 eq.) in portions at 0°C under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 2h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was diluted with H2O (5mL). The resulting mixture was filtered, the filter cake was washed with MeCN (20 mL) (2x30 mL).
  • Step 3 To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-(difluoromethoxy)-3-hydroxypropan-2- yl]carbamate (1 g, 4.14 mmol, 1 eq.) and triphenylphosphine (2.01 g, 7.67 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in THF (4 mL) and DCM (20 mL) were added NBS (1.36 g, 7.67 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in portions at -20°C under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for overnight at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum.
  • Step 4 To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-bromo-3-(difluoromethoxy)propan-2- yl]carbamate (380 mg, 1.25 mmol, 1 eq.), methoxylithium (95 mg, 2.50 mmol, 2 eq.), copper(I) iodide (23.8 mg, 0.125 mmol, 0.1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (43 mg, 0.16 mmol, 0.13 eq.) and 4, 4, 5, 5- tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-l,3,2-dioxaborolane (412 mg, 1.62 mmol,
  • Step 5 To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-(difluoromethoxy)-3-(4,4,5,5- tetramethyl-1, 3, 2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)propan-2-yl] carbamate (2 g, 5.69 mmol, 1 eq.) and KHF2 (0.89 g,
  • Step 1 Into a 500-mL round bottom flask purged and maintained with an inert atmosphere of nitrogen were added ethyl 5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2 -carboxylate (20 g, 130.5 mmol, 1 equiv), NBS (23.24 g, 130.5 mmol, 1 equiv) and DCM (200 mb) at 0°C. The resulting solution was stirred for 2h at room temperature. The resulting mixture was extracted with DCM (3 x 300 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (3x300 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by trituration with MeOH (100 mL) to afford ethyl 4-bromo-5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2 -carboxylate (20 g, 66%) as a white solid.
  • Step 2 A solution of ethyl 4-bromo-5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2-carboxylate (20 g, 86.2 mmol, 1 equiv) in THF (200 ml) was treated with sodium hydride (4.14 g, 172.4 mmol, 2 equiv) for 2 h at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere followed by the addition of O-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)hydroxylamine (25.74 g, 129.3 mmol, 1.5 equiv) in portions at room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred for 2h at room temperature. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2x100 mL). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step 3 A solution of ethyl l-amino-4-bromo-5-methylpyrrole-2-carboxylate (13.5 g, 54.65 mmol, 1 equiv) and ethyl 3-chloro-3-oxopropanoate (9.87 g, 65.5 mmol, 1.2 equiv), Pyridine (8.64 g, 109.3 mmol, 2 equiv) in DCM (200 ml) was stirred for 2h at room temperature. The aqueous layer was extracted with DCM (2x100 mL). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step 4 A solution of ethyl 4-bromo-l-(3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanamido)-5-methylpyrrole-2- carboxylate (7.5 g, 20.7 mmol, 1 equiv) and t-BuOK (4.66 g, 41.5 mmol, 2 equiv) in THF (lOOmL) was stirred for 4h at room temperature. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The resulting mixture was used in the next step directly without further purification.
  • Step 5 A solution of ethyl 6-bromo-7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-3- carboxylate (5 g, 15.8 mmol, 1 equiv) and NaOH (3173.13 mg, 79 mmol, 5 equiv) in 1,4- dioxane:water (1: 1) (lOOmL) was stirred for 16h at 80°C. The mixture was acidified to pH 7 with cone. HC1. The precipitated solids were collected by filtration.
  • Step 6 A solution of 6-bromo-7-methyl-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-2, 4-dione (2.8 g, 11.5 mmol, 1 equiv) and DIEA (2.9g, 23.0 mmol, 2 equiv) in POCI3 (30mL) was stirred for 3 days at 125°C. The mixture was acidified to pH 7 with cone. HC1. The precipitated solids were collected by filtration. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography with the following conditions: column, Cis; mobile phase, MeCN in Water (0.1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm. This resulted in 6-bromo-2,4-dichloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (200 mg, 6.2%) as a light yellow solid.
  • Step 7 A solution of 6-bromo-2,4-dichloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (200 mg, 0.714 mmol, 1 equiv) and l-(thiophen-2-yl)methanamine (82.5 mg, 0.728 mmol, 1.02 equiv), DIEA (185 mg, 1.428 mmol, 2 equiv) in DMSO (3mL) was stirred for 8h at 100°C. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography with the following conditions: column, Cis; mobile phase, MeCN in Water (0. 1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm.
  • Step 8 A solution of 6-bromo-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2-yhnethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (160 mg, 62.8%) as an orange oil.
  • Step 8 A solution of 6-bromo-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2- b]pyridazin-4-amine (160 mg, 0.449 mmol, 1 equiv) and BOC2O (196 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 equiv), DMAP (109 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 equiv), TEA (91 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 equiv) in DCM (3ml) was stirred for 2h at room temperature .
  • the resulting mixture was diluted with water (20mL).
  • the resulting mixture was extracted with CH2Q2 (2 x 20mL).
  • the combined organic layers were washed with NaCl (1x10 m ), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4 After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • the residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography with the following conditions: column, C18; mobile phase, MeCN in Water (0.1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm.
  • Step 9 A solution of tert-butyl N- ⁇ 6-bromo-2-chloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl ⁇ - N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (100 mg, 0.219 mmol, 1 equiv) and tert-butyl N-[(2S)-1- (trifluoroboranuidyl)propan-2-yl]carbamate (99 mg, 0.438 mmol, 2 equiv), potassium (S)-(2-((tert- butoxycarbonyl)amino)propyl)trifluoroborate (17 mg, 0.438 mmol, 2 equiv), butylbis[(3R,5S,7s)- adamantan-l-yl]phosphane (7.9 mg, 0.022 mmol, 0.1 equiv), Pd2(dba)s (20.0 mg, 0.0 mg, 0.0 mg,
  • Step 10 A solution of tert-butyl N-(6- ⁇ 2-[(tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino]propyl ⁇ -2-chloro-7- methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (80 mg, 0.150 mmol, 1 equiv) and TFA (O.lmb) in DCM (2mb) was stirred for 2h at room temperature. The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Step 1 Using the general cross coupling reaction between the tert-butyl (6-bromo-2-chloro- 7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (intermediate 8-1) and potassium (.S)-(2-((/crt-biitoxycarbonyl)amino)propyl)trifluoroboratc (borate salt 1) was obtained 60 mg of tert-butyl (5)-(6-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)propyl)-2-chloro-7-methylpyrrolo[ 1,2- b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate as an orange solid.
  • Step 2 A solution of tert-butyl (S)-(6-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)propyl)-2-chloro-7- methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (80 mg, 0.150 mmol, 1 eq.) and TFA (1 mb) in DCM (2mL) was stirred for 2h at RT.
  • Example 7 Synthesis of 6-((2R,3S)-2-amino-3-fhiorobutyl)-2-chloro-7-methyl-N- (thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 6) [00235]
  • potassium ((2/?.3.S)-2- ((/e/7-biitoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-fliiorobiityl)trifliioroboratc (borate salt 3) was prepared 11 mg of 6- ((2/?.3.S)-2-ammo-3-fhiorobutyl)-2-chloro-7-mcthyl-N-(thiophcn-2-ylmcthyl)pyrrolo
  • LC-MS-(ES, m/z): [M+H] + 366.
  • Example 10 Synthesis of (R)-6-(2-amino-3-(difluoromethoxy)propyl)-2,7-dichloro-N- (thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 9) [00241] In analogy to the preparation of example 2, but using in the first step tert-butyl (6-bromo- 2,7-dichloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (intermediate 8-3) and potassium (J?)-(2-((tert-butoxy carbonyl )amino)-3 -(difluoromethoxy )propyl)trifluoroborate (borate salt 6) was prepared 4 mg of (/?)-6-(2-amino-3-(difluoromcthoxy)propyl)-2.7-dichloro-N-(thiophcn-2
  • Example 12 ATXN3 Quantitative Splicing Assay.
  • Human neuroblastoma SK-N-MC cells were plated in 384-well plates at 20,000 cells/well. Twenty-four hours after plating, cells were treated with compounds for 24 h at appropriate concentrations ranging from 30 pM to 0.6 nM (0.3% DMSO). Treated cells were lysed in 15 pL of lysis buffer, and cDNA was synthesized using the Fast Advanced Cells-to-Ct kit. Two pL of each cDNA was used in qPCR reactions to confirm the exon 4 skipped transcripts of ATXN3. A second set of primers/probe E4E5 was used to detect the transcripts containing exon 4.
  • the third set of primers/probe E8E9 was used to detect total gene level of ATXN3.
  • the qPCR reactions were prepared in 384-well plates in 10 pL volume, using TaqManTM Fast Advanced Master Mix with primers and probes shown in the table below. Reactions were run in a Quant Studio 6 qPCR instrument with default settings.
  • Example 13 ATXN3 total protein assay.
  • Human neuroblastoma SK-N-MC cells were seeded at 10,000 cells/well in 384 well plates one day prior to compound treatment. The concentrations of compounds were tested at appropriate doses ranging from 30 pM to 0.6 nM. After incubation for 48 hours, the cells were lysed with 25 pL of lysis buffer containing protease inhibitors, and total ATXN3 protein levels were assessed by Mesoscale Discovery (MSD) assay developed with one pair of anti-ATXN3 antibodies. The capture and detect antibodies were raised in mouse and rabbit respectively. Anti-rabbit MSD-ST antibody was used for secondary antibody.
  • MSD Mesoscale Discovery
  • ATXN3 recombinant protein was used for standards.
  • the readouts were captured with 35 pL of MSD read buffer and multi-array 384-well high binding plates.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The present application discloses compounds of Formula (I) that modulate splicing of a pre-mRNA, encoded by genes, and methods of treating diseases and conditions associated with gene expression or activity of proteins encoded by genes, such as Spinocerebellar Ataxia 3 (SCA3 or Machado-Joseph Disease).

Description

COMPOSITIONS USEFUL FOR MODULATING SPLICING
RELATED APPLICATIONS
[001] This application claims the benefit of U.S. provisional patent application no. 63/480,558 filed on January 19, 2023, which is incorporated by reference in its entirety.
SEQUENCE LISTING
[002] This instant application contains a Sequence Listing which has been submitted electronically in XML format and is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Said XML copy, created on December 20, 2023, is named 51503-769_601_SL.xml and is 12,471 bytes in size.
BACKGROUND
[003] Spinocerebellar Ataxia 3 (SCA3 or Machado-Joseph Disease) is a rare, inherited, neurodegenerative, autosomal dominant disease. It is characterized by progressive degeneration of the brainstem, cerebellum and spinal cord, however, neurons in other areas of the brain are also affected. Presenting features include gait problems, speech difficulties, clumsiness, and often visual blurring and diplopia; saccadic eye movements become slow and ophthalmoparesis develops, resulting initially in up-gaze restriction. Ambulation becomes increasingly difficult, leading to the need for assistive devices 10 to 15 years following onset. Late in the disease course, individuals are wheelchair bound and have severe dysarthria, dysphagia, facial and temporal atrophy. The disease progresses relentlessly until death occurs at any time from 6 to approximately 30 years after onset through pulmonary complications.
[004] SCA3 is caused by CAG tri-nucleotide repeats in exon 10 of the Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) gene. ATXN3 encodes for a deubiquinase with wide-ranging functions, but it does not appear to be an essential gene. Disease causing variants of the ATXN3 gene have approximately 40 to over 200 CAG tri-nucleotide repeats in exon 10. Expanded CAG repeats in the ATXN3 gene are translated into expanded polyglutamine repeats (polyQ) in the ataxin-3 protein and this toxic Ataxin 3 protein is associated with aggregates. The polyglutamine expanded ataxin-3 protein in these aggregates is ubiquitinated and the aggregates contain other proteins, including heat shock proteins and transcription factors. Aggregates are frequently observed in the brain tissue of SCA3 patients. There are currently no treatments for SCA3.
SUMMARY
[005] In one aspect, described herein is a compound of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Figure imgf000003_0001
Formula (I) wherein R21, R23 and R24 are as defined herein.
[006] Also provided herein are pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound disclosed herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
[007] In some aspects, described herein, is a method of modulating splicing of a Ataxin3 (ATXN3) pre-mRNA, comprising contacting a small molecule splicing modulator compound disclosed herein (SMSM) to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA with a splice site sequence or cells comprising the ATXN3 pre- mRNA, wherein the SMSM binds to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of a subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA.
[008] In some aspects, described herein, is a method of treating, preventing, delaying of progress, or ameliorating symptoms of a disease or a condition associated with Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) expression level or activity level in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a small molecule splicing modulator compound disclosed herein (SMSM), wherein the SMSM binds to a pre-mRNA encoded by ATXN3 and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of the subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA, wherein the amount of full length ATXN3 is reduced.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
[009] All publications, patents, and patent applications mentioned in this specification are herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent, or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0010] Unless otherwise defined, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this disclosure belongs. Although methods and materials similar or equivalent to those described herein can be used in the practice or testing of the present disclosure, suitable methods, and materials are described below.
Definitions [0011] The term “small molecule splicing modulator” or “SMSM” denotes a small molecule compound that binds to a cell component (e.g., DNA, RNA, pre-mRNA, protein, RNP, snRNA, carbohydrates, lipids, co-factors, nutrients, and/or metabolites) and modulates splicing. For example, a SMSM can bind to a polynucleotide, e.g., an RNA (e.g., a pre-mRNA) with an aberrant splice site, resulting in steric modulation of the polynucleotide. For example, a SMSM can bind to a protein, e.g. , a spliceosome protein or a ribonuclear protein, resulting in steric modulation of the protein. For example, a SMSM can bind to a spliceosome component, e.g., a spliceosome protein or snRNA resulting in steric modulation of the spliceosome protein or snRNA. For example, a SMSM is a compound of Formula (I). The term “small molecule splicing modulator” or “SMSM” specifically excludes compounds consisting of oligonucleotides.
[0012] ‘ ‘Steric alteration,” “steric modification,” or “steric modulation” herein refers to changes in the spatial orientation of chemical moieties with respect to each other. A person of ordinary skill in the art would recognize steric mechanisms include, but are not limited to, steric hindrance, steric shielding, steric attraction, chain crossing, steric repulsions, steric inhibition of resonance, and steric inhibition of protonation.
[0013] Any open valency appearing on a carbon, oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom in the structures herein indicates the presence of a hydrogen, unless indicated otherwise.
[0014] The definitions described herein apply irrespective of whether the terms in question appear alone or in combination. It is contemplated that the definitions described herein can be appended to form chemically relevant combinations, such as e.g., “heterocycloalkylaryl,” “haloalkylheteroaryl,” “arylalkylheterocycloalkyl,” or “alkoxyalkyl.” The last member of the combination is the radical which is binding to the rest of the molecule. The other members of the combination are attached to the binding radical in reversed order in respect of the literal sequence, e.g., the combination arylalkylheterocycloalkyl refers to a heterocycloalkyl-radical which is substituted by an alkyl which is substituted by an aryl.
[0015] When indicating the number of substituents, the term “one or more” refers to the range from one substituent to the highest possible number of substitutions, i. e. , replacement of one hydrogen up to replacement of all hydrogens by substituents.
[0016] The term “optional” or “optionally” denotes that a subsequently described event or circumstance can but need not occur, and that the description includes instances where the event or circumstance occurs and instances in which it does not.
[0017] The term “substituent” denotes an atom or a group of atoms replacing a hydrogen atom on the parent molecule.
[0018] The term “substituted” denotes that a specified group bears one or more substituents. Where any group can carry multiple substituents and a variety of possible substituents is provided, the substituents are independently selected and need not to be the same. The term “unsubstituted” means that the specified group bears no substituents. The term “optionally substituted” means that the specified group is unsubstituted or substituted by one or more substituents, independently chosen from the group of possible substituents. When indicating the number of substituents, the term “one or more” means from one substituent to the highest possible number of substitutions, i.e. , replacement of one hydrogen up to replacement of all hydrogens by substituents.
[0019] The terms “compound(s) of this disclosure,” “compound(s) of the present disclosure,” “small molecule steric modulator,” “small molecule splicing modulator,” “steric modulator,” “splicing modulator,” “compounds that modify splicing,” and “compounds modifying splicing” are interchangeably used herein and refer to compounds as disclosed herein and stereoisomers, tautomers, solvates, and salts (e.g., pharmaceutically acceptable salts) thereof.
[0020] The following abbreviations are used throughout the specification: acetic acid (AcOH); ethyl acetate (EtOAc); butyl alcohol (n-BuOH); 1,2-dichloroethane (DCE); dichloromethane (CH2Q2, DCM); diisopropylethylamine (Diipea); dimethylformamide (DMF); hydrogen chloride (HC1); methanol (Me OH); methoxymethyl bromide (MOMBr); N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP); methyl Iodide (Mel); n-propanol (n-PrOH); p-methoxybenzyl (PMB); triethylamine (EtsN); [1,1 - Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene] dichloropalladium (II); (Pd(dppf)C12); sodium ethane thiolate (EtSNa); sodium acetate (NaOAc); sodium hydride (NaH); sodium hydroxide (NaOH); tetrahydropyran (THP); tetrahydrofuran (THF).
[0021] As used herein, Ci-Cx includes C1-C2, C1-C3... Ci-Cx. By way of example only, a group designated as “C1-C4” indicates that there are one to four carbon atoms in the moiety, i.e. groups containing 1 carbon atom, 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms or 4 carbon atoms. Thus, by way of example only, “C1-C4 alkyl” indicates that there are one to four carbon atoms in the alkyl group, i.e., the alkyl group is selected from among methyl, ethyl, propyl, Ao-propyl, w-butyl. Ao-butyl, secbutyl, and /-butyl.
[0022] The term “oxo” refers to the =0 substituent.
[0023] “Carboxyl” refers to -COOH.
[0024] “Cyano” refers to -CN.
[0025] The term “thioxo” refers to the =S substituent.
[0026] “Amidinyl” refers to a radical of the formula -C(=NRa)-N(Ra)2 wherein each Ra is independently a hydrogen, a Ci-Ce alkyl, Ci-Ce haloalkyl, C’s-Cecycloalkyl. or 3-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, an amidinyl is C(=NH)NH2. In some embodiments, an amidinyl is C(=NH)NH(CI-C6 alkyl).
[0027] The term “halo,” “halogen,” and “halide” are used interchangeably herein and denote fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo.
[0028] The term “alkyl” refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain radical, having from one to twenty carbon atoms, and which is attached to the rest of the molecule by a single bond. An alkyl comprising up to 10 carbon atoms is referred to as a C1-C10 alkyl, likewise, for example, an alkyl comprising up to 6 carbon atoms is a Ci-Ce alkyl. Alkyls (and other moieties defined herein) comprising other numbers of carbon atoms are represented similarly. Alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, C1-C10 alkyl, C1-C9 alkyl, Ci-C8 alkyl, C1-C7 alkyl, Ci-C6 alkyl, C1-C5 alkyl, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C2 alkyl, C2-C8 alkyl, C3-G alkyl and C4-C8 alkyl. Representative alkyl groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, w-propyl. 1-methylethyl (z-propyl), w-butyl. i- butyl, s bntyl. w-pcntyl. 1,1 -dimethylethyl (/-butyl). 3-methylhexyl, 2-methylhexyl, 1-ethyl-propyl, and the like. In some embodiments, the alkyl is methyl or ethyl. In some embodiments, the alkyl is - CH(CH3)2 or -C(CH3)3. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, an alkyl group may be optionally substituted as described below. “Alkylene” or “alkylene chain” refers to a straight or branched divalent hydrocarbon chain linking the rest of the molecule to a radical group. In some embodiments, the alkylene is -CH2-, -CH2CH2-, or -CH2CH2CH2- In some embodiments, the alkylene is -CH2-. In some embodiments, the alkylene is -CH2CH2-. In some embodiments, the alkylene is -CH2CH2CH2-.
[0029] The term “alkoxy” refers to a radical of the formula -OR where R is an alkyl radical as defined. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, an alkoxy group may be optionally substituted as described below. Representative alkoxy groups include, but are not limited to, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, pentoxy. In some embodiments, the alkoxy is methoxy. In some embodiments, the alkoxy is ethoxy.
[0030] The term “alkylamino” refers to a radical of the formula -NHR or -NRR where each R is, independently, an alkyl radical as defined above. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, an alkylamino group may be optionally substituted as described below.
[0031] The term “alkenyl” refers to a type of alkyl group in which at least one carbon-carbon double bond is present. In one embodiment, an alkenyl group has the formula -C(R)=CR2, wherein R refers to the remaining portions of the alkenyl group, which may be the same or different. In some embodiments, R is H or an alkyl. In some embodiments, an alkenyl is selected from ethenyl (z.e., vinyl), propenyl (z.e., allyl), butenyl, pentenyl, pentadienyl, and the like. Non-limiting examples of an alkenyl group include -CH=CH2, -C(CH3)=CH2, -CTUCHCH3, -C(CH3)=CHCH3, and - CH2CH=CH2.
[0032] The term “alkynyl” refers to a type of alkyl group in which at least one carbon-carbon triple bond is present. In one embodiment, an alkenyl group has the formula -C=C-R, wherein R refers to the remaining portions of the alkynyl group. In some embodiments, R is H or an alkyl. In some embodiments, an alkynyl is selected from ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl, and the like. Non-limiting examples of an alkynyl group include -C=CH, -C=CCH3 -C=CCH2CH3, -CH2C=CH. [0033] The term “aromatic” refers to a planar ring having a delocalized 71-electron system containing 4n+271 electrons, where n is an integer. Aromatics can be optionally substituted. The term “aromatic” includes both aryl groups (e.g., phenyl, naphthalenyl) and heteroaryl groups (e.g., pyridinyl, furanyl, quinolinyl). [0034] The term “aryl” refers to a radical derived from a hydrocarbon ring system comprising at least one aromatic ring wherein each of the atoms forming the ring is a carbon atom. Aryl groups can be optionally substituted. Examples of aryl groups include, but are not limited to phenyl, and naphthyl. In some embodiments, the aryl is phenyl. Depending on the structure, an aryl group can be a monoradical or a diradical (z.e., an arylene group). Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, the term “aryl” or the prefix “ar-”(such as in “aralkyl”) is meant to include aryl radicals that are optionally substituted. In some embodiments, an aryl group is partially reduced to form a cycloalkyl group defined herein. In some embodiments, an aryl group is fully reduced to form a cycloalkyl group defined herein.
[0035] The term “haloalkyl” denotes an alkyl group wherein at least one of the hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group has been replaced by same or different halogen atoms, particularly fluoro atoms. Examples of haloalkyl include monofluoro-, difluoro-or trifluoro-methyl, -ethyl or -propyl, for example, 3,3,3-trifluoropropyl, 2-fluoroethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, fluoromethyl, or trifluoromethyl. The term “perhaloalkyl” denotes an alkyl group where all hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group have been replaced by the same or different halogen atoms. Exemplary haloalkyl groups further include trifluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, fluoromethyl, trichloromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 1,2- difluoroethyl, 3-bromo-2-fluoropropyl, 1,2-dibromoethyl, and the like. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, a haloalkyl group may be optionally substituted.
[0036] “Hydroxyalkyl” refers to an alkyl radical, as defined above, that is substituted by one or more hydroxyls. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one hydroxyl. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one, two, or three hydroxyls. Hydroxyalkyl include, for example, hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl, hydroxybutyl, or hydroxypentyl. In some embodiments, the hydroxyalkyl is hydroxymethyl.
[0037] “Aminoalkyl” refers to an alkyl radical, as defined above, that is substituted by one or more amines. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one amine. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one, two, or three amines. Aminoalkyl include, for example, aminomethyl, aminoethyl, aminopropyl, aminobutyl, or aminopentyl. In some embodiments, the aminoalkyl is aminomethyl.
[0038] “Cyanoalkyl” refers to an alkyl radical, as defined above, that is substituted by one or more cyano groups. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one cyano group. In some embodiments, the alkyl is substituted with one, two, or three cyano groups. Aminoalkyl include, for example, cyanomethyl, cyanoethyl, cyanopropyl, cyanobutyl, or cyanopentyl.
[0039] The term “haloalkoxy” denotes an alkoxy group wherein at least one of the hydrogen atoms of the alkoxy group has been replaced by same or different halogen atoms, particularly fluoro atoms. Examples of haloalkoxyl include monofluoro-, difluoro-or trifluoro-methoxy, -ethoxy or -propoxy, for example, 3,3,3-trifluoropropoxy, 2-fluoroethoxy, 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy, fluoromethoxy, or trifluoromethoxy. The term “perhaloalkoxy” denotes an alkoxy group where all hydrogen atoms of the alkoxy group have been replaced by the same or different halogen atoms. Examples of haloalkoxyl further include trifluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, fluoromethoxy, trichloromethoxy, 2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy, 1,2-difluoroethoxy, 3-bromo-2-fluoropropoxy, 1,2-dibromoethoxy, and the like. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, a haloalkoxy group may be optionally substituted.
[0040] The term “bicyclic ring system” denotes two rings which are fused to each other via a common single or double bond (annelated bicyclic ring system), via a sequence of three or more common atoms (bridged bicyclic ring system) or via a common single atom (spiro bicyclic ring system). Bicyclic ring systems can be saturated, partially unsaturated, unsaturated, or aromatic. Bicyclic ring systems can comprise heteroatoms selected from N, O, and S.
[0041] The terms “carbocyclic” or “carbocycle” refer to a ring or ring system where the atoms forming the backbone of the ring are all carbon atoms. The term thus distinguishes carbocyclic from “heterocyclic” rings or “heterocycles” in which the ring backbone contains at least one atom which is different from carbon. In some embodiments, at least one of the two rings of a bicyclic carbocycle is aromatic. In some embodiments, both rings of a bicyclic carbocycle are aromatic. Carbocycle includes cycloalkyl and aryl.
[0042] The term “cycloalkyl” refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic non-aromatic radical, wherein each of the atoms forming the ring (z.e., skeletal atoms) is a carbon atom. In some embodiments, cycloalkyls are saturated or partially unsaturated. In some embodiments, cycloalkyls are spirocyclic or bridged compounds. In some embodiments, cycloalkyls are fused with an aromatic ring (in which case the cycloalkyl is bonded through a non-aromatic ring carbon atom). Cycloalkyl groups include groups having from 3 to 10 ring atoms. Representative cycloalkyls include, but are not limited to, cycloalkyls having from three to ten carbon atoms, from three to eight carbon atoms, from three to six carbon atoms, or from three to five carbon atoms. Monocyclic cycloalkyl radicals include, for example, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, and cyclooctyl. In some embodiments, the monocyclic cycloalkyl is cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl or cyclohexyl. In some embodiments, the monocyclic cycloalkyl is cyclopentenyl or cyclohexenyl. In some embodiments, the monocyclic cycloalkyl is cyclopentenyl. Polycyclic radicals include, for example, adamantyl, 1,2-dihydronaphthalenyl, 1,4-dihydronaphthalenyl, tetrainyl, decalinyl, 3,4- dihydronaphthalenyl-l(2H)-one, spiro[2.2]pentyl, norbomyl and bicycle [l.l.l]pentyl. Unless otherwise stated specifically in the specification, a cycloalkyl group may be optionally substituted.
[0043] The term “bridged” refers to any ring structure with two or more rings that contains a bridge connecting two bridgehead atoms. The bridgehead atoms are defined as atoms that are the part of the skeletal framework of the molecule and which are bonded to three or more other skeletal atoms. In some embodiments, the bridgehead atoms are C, N, or P. In some embodiments, the bridge is a single atom or a chain of atoms that connects two bridgehead atoms. In some embodiments, the bridge is a valence bond that connects two bridgehead atoms. In some embodiments, the bridged ring system is cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, the bridged ring system is heterocycloalkyl.
[0044] The term “fused” refers to any ring structure described herein which is fused to an existing ring structure. When the fused ring is a heterocyclyl ring or a heteroaryl ring, any carbon atom on the existing ring structure which becomes part of the fused heterocyclyl ring or the fused heteroaryl ring may be replaced with one or more N, S, and O atoms. The non-limiting examples of fused heterocyclyl or heteroaryl ring structures include 6-5 fused heterocycle, 6-6 fused heterocycle, 5-6 fused heterocycle, 5-5 fused heterocycle, 7-5 fused heterocycle, and 5-7 fused heterocycle.
[0045] The term “fluoroalkyl” refers to an alkyl in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by a fluorine atom. In one aspect, a fluoroalkyl is a Ci-Ce fluoroalkyl. In some embodiments, a fluoroalkyl is selected from trifluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, fluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 1- fluoromethyl-2-fIuoroethyl, and the like.
[0046] The term “heteroalkyl” refers to an alkyl group in which one or more skeletal atoms of the alkyl are selected from an atom other than carbon, e.g., oxygen, nitrogen (e.g., -NH-, -N(alkyl)-, or - N(aryl)-), sulfur (e.g. , -S-, -S(=O)-, or -S(=O)2-), or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl is attached to the rest of the molecule at a carbon atom of the heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl is attached to the rest of the molecule at a heteroatom of the heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl is a Ci-Ce heteroalkyl. Representative heteroalkyl groups include, but are not limited to -OCTbOMc. -OCH2CH2OH, OC bC bOMc. or - OCH2CH2OCH2CH2NH2. In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl contains one skeletal heteroatom. In some embodiments, a heteroalkyl contains 1-3 skeletal heteroatoms.
[0047] The term “heteroalkylene” refers to an alkyl radical as described above where one or more carbon atoms of the alkyl is replaced with a O, N or S atom. “Heteroalkylene” or “heteroalkylene chain” refers to a straight or branched divalent heteroalkyl chain linking the rest of the molecule to a radical group. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, the heteroalkyl or heteroalkylene group may be optionally substituted as described below. Representative heteroalkylene groups include, but are not limited to -OCH2CH2O-, -OCH2CH2OCH2CH2O-, or - OCH2CH2OCH2CH2OCH2CH2O-.
[0048] The term “heterocycloalkyl” refers to a cycloalkyl group that includes at least one heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, the heterocycloalkyl radical may be a monocyclic, or bicyclic ring system, which may include fused (when fused with an aryl or a heteroaryl ring, the heterocycloalkyl is bonded through a non-aromatic ring atom) or bridged ring systems. In some embodiments, a heterocycloalkyl is monocyclic. In some embodiments, a heterocycloalkyl is bicyclic. In some embodiments, a heterocycloalkyl is partially saturated. In some embodiments, a heterocycloalkyl is fully saturated. The nitrogen, carbon, or sulfur atoms in the heterocyclyl radical may be optionally oxidized. The nitrogen atom may be optionally quatemized. The heterocycloalkyl radical is partially or fully saturated. Examples of heterocycloalkyl radicals include, but are not limited to, dioxolanyl, thienyl[l,3]dithianyl, tetrahydroquinolyl, tetrahydroisoquinolyl, decahydroquinolyl, decahydroisoquinolyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, octahydroindolyl, octahydroisoindolyl, 2-oxopiperazinyl, 2-oxopiperidinyl, 2-oxopyrrolidinyl, oxazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, 4-piperidonyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolidinyl, quinuclidinyl, thiazolidinyl, tetrahydrofuryl, trithianyl, tetrahydropyranyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiamorpholinyl, 1-oxo- thiomorpholinyl, 1,1-dioxo-thiomorpholinyl. The term heterocycloalkyl also includes all ring forms of carbohydrates, including but not limited to monosaccharides, disaccharides, and oligosaccharides. Unless otherwise noted, heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 12 carbons in the ring. In some embodiments, heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 10 carbons in the ring. In some embodiments, heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 10 carbons in the ring and 1 or 2 N atoms. In some embodiments, heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 10 carbons in the ring and 3 or 4 N atoms. In some embodiments, heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 12 carbons, 0-2 N atoms, 0-2 O atoms, 0-2 P atoms, and 0-1 S atoms in the ring. In some embodiments, heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 12 carbons, 1-3 N atoms, 0-1 0 atoms, and 0-1 S atoms in the ring. It is understood that when referring to the number of carbon atoms in a heterocycloalkyl, the number of carbon atoms in the heterocycloalkyl is not the same as the total number of atoms (including the heteroatoms) that make up the heterocycloalkyl (i.e. skeletal atoms of the heterocycloalkyl ring). Unless stated otherwise specifically in the specification, a heterocycloalkyl group may be optionally substituted.
[0049] The term “heterocycle” or “heterocyclic” refers to heteroaromatic rings (also known as heteroaryls) and heterocycloalkyl rings (also known as heteroalicyclic groups) that includes at least one heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, wherein each heterocyclic group has from 3 to 12 atoms in its ring system, and with the proviso that any ring does not contain two adjacent O or S atoms. In some embodiments, heterocycles are monocyclic, bicyclic, polycyclic, spirocyclic or bridged compounds. Non-aromatic heterocyclic groups (also known as heterocycloalkyls) include rings having 3 to 12 atoms in its ring system and aromatic heterocyclic groups include rings having 5 to 12 atoms in its ring system. The heterocyclic groups include benzo-fused ring systems. Examples of non-aromatic heterocyclic groups are pyrrolidinyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, oxazolidinonyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thioxanyl, piperazinyl, aziridinyl, azetidinyl, oxetanyl, thietanyl, homopiperidinyl, oxepanyl, thiepanyl, oxazepinyl, diazepinyl, thiazepinyl, 1 ,2,3,6— tetrahydropyridinyl, pyrrolin-2-yl, pyrrolin-3-yl, indolinyl, 2H-pyranyl, 4H-pyranyl, dioxanyl, 1,3- dioxolanyl, pyrazolinyl, dithianyl, dithiolanyl, dihydropyranyl, dihydrothienyl, dihydrofuranyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexanyl, 3-azabicyclo[4.1.0]heptanyl, s h-indolyl, indolin-2-onyl, isoindolin-l-onyl, isoindoline- 1,3-dionyl, 3,4-dihydroisoquinolin- I(2H)-onyl, 3,4-dihydroquinolin-2(lH)-onyl, isoindoline- 1,3-dithionyl, benzo[d]oxazol-2(3H)- onyl, lH-benzo[d]imidazol-2(3H)-onyl, benzo [d]thiazol-2(3H)-onyl, and quinolizinyl. Examples of aromatic heterocyclic groups are pyridinyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazinyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrrolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, indolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzofuranyl, cinnolinyl, indazolyl, indolizinyl, phthalazinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, isoindolyl, pteridinyl, purinyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, furazanyl, benzofurazanyl, benzothiophenyl, benzothiazolyl, benzoxazolyl, quinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, and furopyridinyl. The foregoing groups are either C-attached (or C-linked) or N- attached where such is possible. For instance, a group derived from pyrrole includes both pyrrol- 1-yl ( ' attached) or pyrrol-3-yl (C-attached). Further, a group derived from imidazole includes imidazol-l-yl or imidazol-3-yl (both ' attached) or imidazol-2-yl, imidazol-4-yl or imidazol-5-yl (all C-attached). The heterocyclic groups include benzo-fused ring systems. Non-aromatic heterocycles are optionally substituted with one or two oxo (=0) moieties, such as pyrrolidin-2-one. In some embodiments, at least one of the two rings of a bicyclic heterocycle is aromatic. In some embodiments, both rings of a bicyclic heterocycle are aromatic.
[0050] The term “heteroaryl” refers to an aryl group that includes one or more ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. The heteroaryl can be monocyclic or bicyclic. Illustrative examples of monocyclic heteroaryls include pyridinyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazinyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrrolyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, furazanyl, indolizine, indole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, indazole, benzimidazole, purine, quinolizine, quinoline, isoquinoline, cinnoline, phthalazine, quinazoline, quinoxaline, 1,8-naphthyridine, and pteridine. Illustrative examples of monocyclic heteroaryls include pyridinyl, imidazolyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, pyrazinyl, tetrazolyl, furyl, thienyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyrrolyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl, oxadiazolyl, thiadiazolyl, and furazanyl. Illustrative examples of bicyclic heteroaryls include indolizine, indole, benzofuran, benzothiophene, indazole, benzimidazole, purine, quinolizine, quinoline, isoquinoline, cinnoline, phthalazine, quinazoline, quinoxaline, 1,8-naphthyridine, and pteridine. In some embodiments, heteroaryl is pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, thiazolyl, thienyl, thiadiazolyl or furyl. In some embodiments, a heteroaryl contains 0-6 N atoms in the ring. In some embodiments, a heteroaryl contains 1-4 N atoms in the ring. In some embodiments, a heteroaryl contains 4-6 N atoms in the ring. In some embodiments, a heteroaryl contains 0-4 N atoms, 0-1 0 atoms, 0-1 P atoms, and 0-1 S atoms in the ring. In some embodiments, a heteroaryl contains 1-4 N atoms, 0-1 0 atoms, and 0-1 S atoms in the ring. In some embodiments, heteroaryl is a C1-C9 heteroaryl. In some embodiments, monocyclic heteroaryl is a C1-C5 heteroaryl. In some embodiments, monocyclic heteroaryl is a 5-membered or 6-membered heteroaryl. In some embodiments, a bicyclic heteroaryl is a Ce-C heteroaryl. In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is partially reduced to form a heterocycloalkyl group defined herein. In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is fully reduced to form a heterocycloalkyl group defined herein. [0051] The term “moiety” refers to a specific segment or functional group of a molecule. Chemical moieties are often recognized chemical entities embedded in or appended to a molecule.
[0052] The term “optionally substituted” or “substituted” means that the referenced group is optionally substituted with one or more additional group(s) individually and independently selected from D, halogen, -CN, -NH2, -NH(alkyl), -N(alkyl)2, -OH, -CO2H, -CO2alkyl, -C(=O)NH2, - C(=O)NH(alkyl), -C(=O)N(alkyl)2, -S(=O)2NH2, -S(=O)2NH(alkyl), -S(=O)2N(alkyl)2, alkyl, cycloalkyl, fluoroalkyl, heteroalkyl, alkoxy, fluoroalkoxy, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, alkylsulfoxide, arylsulfoxide, alkylsulfone, and arylsulfone. In some other embodiments, optional substituents are independently selected from D, halogen, -CN, -NH2, - NH(CH3), -N(CH3)2, -OH, -CO2H, -CO2(C1-C4 alkyl), -C(=O)NH2, -C(=O)NH(CI-C4 alkyl), - C(=O)N(Ci-C4 alkyl)2, -S(=O)2NH2, -S(=O)2NH(CI-C4 alkyl), -S(=O)2N(Ci-C4alkyl)2, Ci-C4 alkyl, C3-Ce cycloalkyl, C1-C4 fluoroalkyl, C1-C4 heteroalkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 fluoroalkoxy, -SC1-C4 alkyl, -S(=O)Ci-C4 alkyl, and -S(=O)2(Ci-C4 alkyl). In some embodiments, optional substituents are independently selected from D, halogen, -CN, -NH2, -OH, -NH(CH3), -N(CH3)3, - NH(cyclopropyl), -CH3, CINC H,. -CF3, -OCH3, and -OCF3. In some embodiments, substituted groups are substituted with one or two of the preceding groups. In some embodiments, an optional substituent on an aliphatic carbon atom (acyclic or cyclic) includes oxo (=0).
[0053] The term “tautomer” refers to a proton shift from one atom of a molecule to another atom of the same molecule. The compounds presented herein may exist as tautomers. Tautomers are compounds that are interconvertible by migration of a hydrogen atom, accompanied by a switch of a single bond and adjacent double bond. In bonding arrangements where tautomerization is possible, a chemical equilibrium of the tautomers will exist. All tautomeric forms of the compounds disclosed herein are contemplated. The exact ratio of the tautomers depends on several factors, including temperature, solvent, and pH. Some examples of tautomeric interconversions include:
Figure imgf000012_0001
[0054] The terms “administer,” “administering,” “administration,” and the like, as used herein, refer to the methods that may be used to enable delivery of compounds or compositions to the desired site of biological action. These methods include but are not limited to oral routes (p.o.), intraduodenal routes (i.d.), parenteral injection (including intravenous (i.v.), subcutaneous (s.c.), intraperitoneal (i.p.), intramuscular (i.m.), intravascular or infusion (inf.)), topical (top.) and rectal (p.r.) administration. Those of skill in the art are familiar with administration techniques that can be employed with the compounds and methods described herein. In some embodiments, the compounds and compositions described herein are administered orally.
[0055] The terms “co-administration” or the like, as used herein, are meant to encompass administration of the selected therapeutic agents to a single patient and are intended to include treatment regimens in which the agents are administered by the same or different route of administration or at the same or different time.
[0056] The term “subject” or “patient” encompasses mammals. Examples of mammals include, but are not limited to, any member of the mammalian class: humans, non-human primates such as chimpanzees, and other apes and monkey species; farm animals such as cattle, horses, sheep, goats, swine; domestic animals such as rabbits, dogs, and cats; laboratory animals including rodents, such as rats, mice and guinea pigs, and the like. In one aspect, the mammal is a human. The term “animal” as used herein comprises human beings and non-human animals. In one embodiment, a “non-human animal” is a mammal, for example a rodent such as rat or a mouse. In one embodiment, a non-human animal is a mouse.
[0057] The term “pharmaceutically acceptable” denotes an attribute of a material which is useful in preparing a pharmaceutical composition that is generally safe, non toxic, and neither biologically nor otherwise undesirable and is acceptable for veterinary as well as human pharmaceutical use. “Pharmaceutically acceptable” can refer a material, such as a carrier or diluent, which does not abrogate the biological activity or properties of the compound, and is relatively nontoxic, i.e. , the material may be administered to an individual without causing undesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious manner with any of the components of the composition in which it is contained.
[0058] The terms “pharmaceutically acceptable excipient”, “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” and “therapeutically inert excipient” can be used interchangeably and denote any pharmaceutically acceptable ingredient in a pharmaceutical composition having no therapeutic activity and being nontoxic to the subject administered, such as disintegrators, binders, fillers, solvents, buffers, tonicity agents, stabilizers, antioxidants, surfactants, carriers, diluents, excipients, preservatives or lubricants used in formulating pharmaceutical products.
[0059] The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” denotes salts which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include both acid and base addition salts. A “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” can refer to a formulation of a compound that does not cause significant irritation to an organism to which it is administered and/or does not abrogate the biological activity and properties of the compound. In some embodiments, pharmaceutically acceptable salts are obtained by reacting a SMSM compound of the present disclosure with acids. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are also obtained by reacting a compound of the present disclosure with a base to form a salt.
[0060] As used herein, a “small molecular weight compound” can be used interchangeably with “small molecule” or “small organic molecule.” Small molecules refer to compounds other than peptides or oligonucleotides; and typically have molecular weights of less than about 2000 Daltons, e.g., less than about 900 Daltons.
Small Molecule Splicing Modulators (SMSMs)
[0061] It has now been found that compounds of this disclosure, and pharmaceutically acceptable compositions thereof, are effective as agents for use in treating, preventing, or ameliorating a disease or a condition associated with a target RNA. The present disclosure provides the unexpected discovery that certain small chemical molecules can modify splicing events in pre-mRNA molecules, herein referred to as small molecule splicing modulators (SMSMs). These SMSMs can modulate specific splicing events in specific pre-mRNA molecules. The small molecules of this disclosure are different from and are not related to antisense or antigene oligonucleotides.
[0062] In one aspect, a SMSM described herein is a compound of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000014_0001
wherein,
- R21 is thiophenyl, which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, or 3, independently selected R1A groups; each R1A is independently selected from halo, CN, NO2, Ci-e alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2- e alkynyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, -C(=O)OH, -C(=O)Ci-6 alkyl, -C(=O)Ci-6 haloalkyl, and - C(=O)Ci.6 alkoxy;
- R23 is selected from the group consisting of H, azido, halo, CN, NO2, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2- e alkynyl, C1-6 heteroalkyl, -(C1-6 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(C1-6 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-6 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(C1-6 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl, ORa3, SRa3, C(=O)Rb3, C(=O)ORb3, NRc3Rd3, C(=O)NRc3Rd3, - OC(=O)NRc3Rd3, NRc3C(=O)Rb3, NRc3C(=O)ORb3, NRc3C(=O)NRc3Rd3, NRc3S(=O)2Rb3, NRc3S(=O)2NRc3Rd3, S(O)NRc3Rd3, and S(O)2NRc3Rd3, wherein the Ci-e alkyl, C2.e alkenyl, C2. e alkynyl, Ci-6 heteroalkyl, Ci-6 alkylene, Ci-6 heteroalkylene, C3-10 cycloalkyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl are each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups;
- R24 is selected from the group consisting of H, azido, halo, CN, NO2, C1-6 alkyl, C2.e alkenyl, C2. e alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl, ORa4, C(=O)Rb4, C(=O)ORb4, NRc4Rd4, C(=O)NRc4Rd4, - OC(=O)NRc4Rd4, NRc4C(=O)Rb4, NRc4C(=O)ORb4, NRc4C(=O)NRc4Rd4, NRc4S(=O)2Rb4, NRc4S(=O)2NRc4Rd4, S(O)NRc4Rd4, and S(O)2NRc4Rd4, wherein the Ci-e alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C2.e alkenyl, C2. e alkynyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl are each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups;
- each Ra3, Rb3, Rc3, Rd3, Ra4, Rb4, Rc4, and Rd4, is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C1-6 alkyl, C2.e alkenyl, C2.e alkynyl, C1-6 hydroxyalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, Ci- e alkoxy, - (C1-6 alkylene)-Ci-6 alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, -(C1-6 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, Ce- 10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein the C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2.e alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, -(C1-6 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl are each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups; or Rc3 and Rd3 together with the N atom to which they are connected, come together to form a 5-10 membered heteroaryl or 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl ring, each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups; or Rc4 and Rd4 together with the N atom to which they are connected, come together to form a 5-10 membered heteroaryl or 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl ring, each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups; and
- each R20 is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2.4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, Ci-
4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), -(C1-4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, Ci- 4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbonyl, Ci-
4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-4 alkylcarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, Ci-
4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, Ci-
4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, Ci-
4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, and amidinyl. [0063] In some embodiments of a compound of Formula (I) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof,
R21 is thiophenyl, which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, or 3, independently selected R1A groups; wherein each R1A is independently selected from halo, CN, NO2, alkyl, alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, alkoxy, -C(=O)OH, an ether group, or an ester group, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted;
R23 is selected from the group consisting of H, oxo, azido, halo, CN, NO2, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, ORa3, SRa3, C(=O)Rb3, C(=O)ORb3, NRc3Rd3, C(=O)NRc3Rd3, -OC(=O)NRc3Rd3, NRc3C(=O)Rb3, NRc3C(=O)ORb3, NRc3C(=O)NRc3Rd3, NRc3S(=O)2Rb3, NRc3S(=O)2NRc3Rd3, S(O)NRc3Rd3, and S(O)2NRc3Rd3, wherein the alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocycloalkyl are each unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups;
R24 is selected from the group consisting of H, oxo, azido, halo, CN, NO2, alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, ORa4, C(=O)Rb4, C(=O)ORb4, NRc4Rd4, C(=0)NRc4Rd4, - 0C(=0)NRc4Rd4, NRc4C(=0)Rb4, NRc4C(=0)0Rb4, NRc4C(=0)NRc4Rd4, NRc4S(=O)2Rb4, NRc4S(=O)2NRc4Rd4, S(O)NRc4Rd4, and S(O)2NRc4Rd4, wherein the alkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocycloalkyl are each unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups; each Ra3, Rb3, Rc3, Rd3, Ra4, Rb4, Rc4, and Rd4, is independently selected from the group consisting of H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocycloalkyl, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups; each Rc3 and Rd3 together with the N atom to which they are connected, come together to form a heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl ring, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups; or each Rc4 and Rd4 together with the N atom to which they are connected, come together to form a heteroaryl or heterocycloalkyl ring, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups; and each R20 is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, amino, carbamyl, or carbamoyl.
[0064] In some embodiments, R24 is selected from the group consisting of H, azido, halo, CN, NO2, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl, ORa4, C(=O)Rb4, C(=O)ORb4, NRc4Rd4, C(=O)NRc4Rd4, - OC(=O)NRc4Rd4, NRc4C(=O)Rb4, NRc4C(=O)ORb4, NRc4C(=0)NRc4Rd4, NRc4S(=O)2Rb4, NRc4S(=O)2NRc4Rd4, S(O)NRc4Rd4, and S(O)2NRc4Rd4, wherein the Ci-6 alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C6- io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl are each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups. In some embodiments, R24 is selected from the group consisting of H, halo, CN, NO2, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, OH, Ci-e alkoxyl, and C1-6 haloalkyl. In some embodiments, R24 is selected from the group consisting of H, halo, CN, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-6 cycloalkyl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, OH, Ci-e alkoxyl, and C1-6 haloalkyl. In some embodiments, R24 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, OH, halo, CN, substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkoxyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-6 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-4 alkenyl, and substituted or unsubstituted C2-4 alkynyl. In some embodiments, R24 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R24 is halogen. In some embodiments, R24 is -Br. In some embodiments, R24 is -F. In some embodiments, R24 is -Cl. In some embodiments, R24 is -CN. In some embodiments, R24 is OH. In some embodiments, R24 is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R24 is C1.4 haloalkyl. In some embodiments, R24 is C1.4 alkoxyl. In some embodiments, R24 is methyl. In some embodiments, R24 is ethyl. In some embodiments, R24 is cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R24 is cyclopropyl. In some embodiments, R24 is C2-4 alkenyl. In some embodiments, R24 is C2-4 alkynyl. In some embodiments, R24 is ethynyl. In some embodiment, R24 is propynyl.
[0065] In some embodiments, R21 is unsubstituted or substituted thiophenyl. In some embodiments, R21 is unsubstituted thiophenyl. In some embodiments, R21 is substituted thiophenyl. In some embodiments, R21 is thiophenyl, which is substituted with 1, 2, or 3, independently selected R1A groups; wherein each R1A is independently selected from halo, CN, NO2, alkyl, alkenyl, C2- e alkynyl, alkoxy, -C(=O)OH, an ether group, or an ester group, each of which is unsubstituted or substituted. In some embodiments, R21 is thiophenyl, which is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected R1A groups; wherein each R1A is independently selected from halo, Ci-ealkyl, Ci-ehaloalkyl, and Ci-ealkoxy. In some embodiments, R21 is thiophenyl, which is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 substituents independently selected R1A groups; wherein each R1A is independently selected from halo, Ci-3alkyl, Ci.shaloalkyl, and Cualkoxy. In some embodiments, each R1A is independently selected from halo, CN, NO2, Cualkyl, Cuhaloalkyl. and Cualkoxy. In some embodiments, each R1A is independently selected from halo, Ci.salkyl, Ci.shaloalkyl, and C’ualkoxy. In some embodiments, each R1A is independently selected from halo, Ci.salkyl, and Ci.shaloalkyl. In some embodiments, R1A is halo. In some embodiments, R1A is fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo. In some embodiments, R1A is fluoro. In some embodiments, R1A is chloro. In some embodiments, R1A is bromo. In some embodiments, R1A is iodo. [0066] In some embodiments, R21 is selected from the group consisting
Figure imgf000018_0001
Figure imgf000018_0002
, In some embodiments, R21 is
Figure imgf000018_0003
. In some embodiments, R21
Figure imgf000018_0004
some embodiments,
Figure imgf000018_0005
In some embodiments,
Figure imgf000018_0006
embodiments, R21 is
Figure imgf000018_0008
In some embodiments,
Figure imgf000018_0007
some embodiments, R21 is
Figure imgf000018_0009
, [0067] In some embodiments, R23 is H.
[0068] In some embodiments, R23 is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups, wherein each R20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, amino, Ci-salkyl, Ci-salkoxy, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, carbamyl, and carbamoyl. In some embodiments, R23 is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups, wherein each R20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, and Ci-salkoxy. In some embodiments, R23 is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups, wherein each R20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, Ci-salkyl, Ci- shaloalkyl, amino, and C1.3alkoxy.In some embodiments, R23 is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups, wherein each R20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, amino, and Ci-salkoxy. In some embodiments, R20 group is OH. In some embodiments, R20 group is halo. In some embodiments, R20 group is amino. In some embodiments, R20 group is Ci-salkoxy.
[0069] In some embodiments, R23 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R23 is Ci-6 alkyl, wherein Ci-6 alkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups. In some embodiments, R23 is Ci-6 alkyl, wherein Ci-6 alkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups, wherein each R20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, amino, Ci-salkyl, Ci-salkoxy, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, carbamyl, and carbamoyl. In some embodiments, R23 is C1-6 alkyl, wherein C1-6 alkyl is substituted with 1 , 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups, wherein each R20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, and Ci-salkoxy.
[0070] In some embodiments, R23 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkenyl. In some embodiments, R23 is C1-6 alkenyl, wherein C1-6 alkenyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups.
[0071] In some embodiments, R23 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-e alkynyl. In some embodiments, R23 is Ci-e alkynyl, wherein Ci-e alkynyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups.
[0072] In some embodiments, R23 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R23 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, the C1-6 heteroalkyl is -CH2CH(NH2)CH2-S(=O)2-CH3 or - CH2CH(NH2)CH2-S(=O)-CH3. In some embodiments, R23 is -CH2CH(NH2)CH2-S(=O)2-CH3. In some embodiments, R23 is -CH2CH(NH2)CH2-S(=O)-CH3. In some embodiments, R23 is CH2CHNH2CH3. In some embodiments, R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2CH3. In some embodiments, R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2CH(CH3)2. In some embodiments, R23 is CH2CHNH2CHFCH3. In some embodiments, R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2OCH3. In some embodiments, R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2OCD3.
[0073] In some embodiments, R23 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R23 is C1-6 heteroalkyl, wherein the C1-6 heteroalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups. In some embodiments, R23 is C1-6 heteroalkyl, wherein the C1-6 heteroalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups, wherein each R20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, amino, Cualkyl, Ci-salkoxy, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, carbamyl, and carbamoyl. In some embodiments, R23 is C1-6 heteroalkyl, wherein the C1-6 heteroalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups, wherein each R20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, and Ci^alkoxy. In some embodiments, R23 is C1-6 alkyl, wherein C1-6 alkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups, wherein each R20 group is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, halo, amino, and Ci-salkoxy.
[0074] In some embodiments, R23 is substituted or unsubstituted -(C1-6 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R23 is -(C1-6 alkylene) -C3- 10 cycloalkyl, wherein -(C1-6 alkylene) -C3- 10 cycloalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups. In some embodiments, the Cn e alkylene is C1-3 alkylene. In some embodiments, the C1-6 alkylene is CH2. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 3-6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-
10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 3 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 5 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is
Figure imgf000020_0001
Figure imgf000020_0002
[0075] In some embodiments, R23 is substituted or unsubstituted -(C1-6 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R23 is -(C1-6 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein -(C1-6 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups. In some embodiments, the C1-6 alkylene is C1-3 alkylene. In some embodiments, the C1-6 alkylene is CH2. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4-6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 5 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl contains 0-1 oxygen and 0-2 nitrogen atoms. In some embodiments, the
Figure imgf000020_0003
Figure imgf000021_0001
[0076] In some embodiments, R23 is substituted or unsubstituted -(Ci-6 heteroalkylene)-C3- io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R23 is -(Ci-6 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, wherein -(Ci- e heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups. In some embodiments, the heteroalkylene is C 1.3 heteroalkylene. In some embodiments, the C3-
10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 3-6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-
10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 3 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 5 membered ring. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the heteroalkylene is C1-3 heteroalkylene. In some
Figure imgf000021_0002
[0077] In some embodiments, R23 is substituted or unsubstituted -(C1-6 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R23 is -(C1-6 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein -(C1-6 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is substituted with 1, 2, or 3 independently selected R20 groups. In some embodiments, the heteroalkylene is C1-3 heteroalkylene. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4-6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 4 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 5 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is an optionally substituted 6 membered ring. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl contains 0-1 oxygen and 0-2 nitrogen atoms. In some embodiments, the
Figure imgf000021_0003
Figure imgf000022_0001
Figure imgf000023_0001
embodiments, R23 is any one selected from the group consisting
Figure imgf000023_0002
Figure imgf000024_0001
some embodiments,
Figure imgf000024_0002
some embodiments, R23 is
Figure imgf000024_0003
[0079] In some embodiments, each R20 is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Ci- 4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, Ci- 4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxy carbonyl, Ci- 4 alkylcarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1.4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, and amidinyl. In some embodiments, each R20 is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1.4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, Ci- 4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, C1.4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, and amidinyl. In some embodiments, each R20 is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1-4 alkyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, carbamyl C1.4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, and amidinyl. In some embodiments, R20 is OH. In some embodiments, R20 is NH2. In some embodiments, R20 is SH. In some embodiments, R20 is CN. In some embodiments, R20 is F. In some embodiments, R20 is carbamyl.
[0080] In some embodiments, R24 is selected from the group consisting of halo, CN, and substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R24 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, OH, halo, CN, substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkoxyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-10 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-4 alkenyl, and substituted or unsubstituted C2-4 alkynyl.
[0081] In some embodiments, each Ra3, Rb3, Rc3, Rd3, Ra4, Rb4, Rc4, and Rd4, is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 hydroxyalkyl, and C1-6 haloalkyl. In some embodiments, each Ra3, Rb3, Rc3, Rd3, Ra4, Rb4, Rc4, and Rd4, is independently selected from the group consisting of H and C1-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, each Ra3, Rb3, Rc3, Rd3, Ra4, Rb4, Rc4, and Rd4, is independently selected from the group consisting of H and C1-3 alkyl. In some embodiments, each Ra3,
Rb3, Rc3, Rd3, Ra4, Rb4, Rc4, and Rd4, is hydrogen.
[0082] In some embodiments, the compound is of the Formula (Ila):
Figure imgf000025_0001
wherein
R21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I); each R20a, R20b, and R20c is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1.4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, Ci-
4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1.4 heteroalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, - (C1-3 alkylene) -C3- 10 cycloalkyl, -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(Ci-
3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, amidinyl, amino, C1.4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, Ci-
4 alkylcarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1.4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, wherein: each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1.4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1.4 aminoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1.4 alkoxy, and amino, or R20a and R20b are taken together to form a =NH or =N(CI-4 alkyl), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[0083] In some embodiments of the compound of the Formula (Ila) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, each R20a, R20b, and R20c is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1.4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, Ci-
4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, Ci-
4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxy carbonyl, Ci- 4 alkylcarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-
4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-
4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminocarbonylamino .
[0084] In some embodiments, R20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH( CFF^. In some embodiments, R20c is NH2. In some embodiments, R20b is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R20a and R20b are taken together to form a =NH or =N(CI-4 alkyl). In some embodiments, R20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10
Figure imgf000026_0001
In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is a 3-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In
Figure imgf000026_0002
is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R20a is Ci- 4 heteroalkyl.
[0085] In some embodiments, the compound is of the Formula (lib) :
Figure imgf000026_0003
Formula (lib), wherein
R21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
R20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1-4 alkyl, C2- 4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)- (C1-4 alkoxy), -(C1-4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1-4 heteroalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Ci-
3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, amidinyl, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, di(Ci-
4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-4 alkylcarbonylamino, Ci-
4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, wherein each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[0086] In some embodiments of the compound of the Formula (lib) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof: R20a is selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1-4 alkyl, C2- 4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1.4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)- (C1-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-4 alkylcarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1.4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, Ci- 4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, Ci- 4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino.
[0087] In some embodiments, R20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH( 013)2. In some embodiments, R20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci- 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl
Figure imgf000028_0001
Figure imgf000028_0002
some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is a 3-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered
Figure imgf000028_0003
embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted Cn 4 alkyl.
[0088] In some embodiments, the compound is of the Formula (Illa):
Figure imgf000028_0004
Formula (Illa), wherein
R21 and R24 each has the meaning defined in Formula (I); each R20a, R20b, and R20c is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1.4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, Cn
4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1.4 heteroalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, - (C1-3 alkylene) -C3- 10 cycloalkyl, -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(Cn
3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, amidinyl, amino, C1.4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, Cn 4 alkylcarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Cn
4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, wherein: each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino, or R20a and R20b are taken together to form a =NH or =N(CI-4 alkyl), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[0089] In some embodiments of the compound of the Formula (Illa) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, each R20a, R20b, and R20c is independently selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, Cn 4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, Cn 4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxy carbonyl, Cn 4 alkylcarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1.4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminocarbonylamino .
[0090] In some embodiments, R20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH(CH3)2. In some embodiments, R20c is NH2. In some embodiments, R20b is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-
10 cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is
Figure imgf000029_0001
optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl
Figure imgf000030_0001
Figure imgf000030_0002
Figure imgf000030_0003
some embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R20a is Ci-4heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is C1.4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted C1-4 alkyl.
[0091] In some embodiments, the compound is of the Formula (Illb):
Figure imgf000030_0004
Formula (Illb), wherein
R21 and R24 each has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
R20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1.4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)- (C1-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1.4 heteroalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Ci-
3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, amidinyl, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonylamino, Ci-
4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1.4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, wherein each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[0092] In some embodiments of the compound of the Formula (Illb) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, R20a is selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, Ci-
4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1.4 alkoxy, -(Ci- 4 alkyl)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), -(C1-4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, C1.4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1.4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonylamino, Ci- 4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1.4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino. [0093] In some embodiments, R20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH(CH3)2. In some embodiments, R20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci- 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments,
Figure imgf000031_0001
membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered
Figure imgf000031_0002
embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted Ci- 4 alkyl. [0094] In some embodiments, R24 is Ci-6 alkyl. In some embodiments, R24 is methyl. In some embodiments, R24 is halo. In some embodiments, R24 is fluoro, bromo, or chloro. In some embodiments, R24 is hydrogen. In some embodiments, R24 is CN. In some embodiments, R24 is C3-10 cycloalkyl.
[0095] In some embodiments, the compound is of the Formula (IIIc):
Figure imgf000032_0001
wherein
R21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
R20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1.4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)- (C1-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1.4 heteroalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Ci-
3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, amidinyl, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonylamino, Ci-
4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1.4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, wherein each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[0096] In some embodiments of the compound of the Formula (IIIc) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, R20a is selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, Ci-
4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1.4 alkoxy, -(Ci- 4 alkyl)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), -(C1-4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 5-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, C1.4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1.4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonylamino, Ci- 4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino. [0097] In some embodiments, R20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH( CFF^. In some embodiments, R20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Cn 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments,
Figure imgf000033_0001
membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered
Figure imgf000033_0002
embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted Cn 4 alkyl.
[0098] In some embodiments, the compound is of the Formula (Illd):
Figure imgf000033_0003
Formula (Illd), wherein R21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
R20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)- (C1-4 alkoxy), -(C1-4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1-4 heteroalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Ci-
3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, amidinyl, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, di(Ci-
4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-4 alkylcarbonylamino, Ci-
4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, wherein each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino, wherein each of R20 is independently H or R20 as disclosed herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[0099] In some embodiments, R20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R20a is C^C HICH,):. In some embodiments, R20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci- 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments,
Figure imgf000034_0001
membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered
Figure imgf000034_0002
Figure imgf000035_0001
embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted Ci- 4 alkyl.
[00100] In some embodiments, the compound is of the Formula (Ille):
Figure imgf000035_0002
wherein
R21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
R20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)- (C1-4 alkoxy), -(C1-4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1-4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1-4 heteroalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Ci-
3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, amidinyl, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, di(Ci-
4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-4 alkylcarbonylamino, Ci-
4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, wherein each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1-4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino, wherein R20 is H or R20 as disclosed herein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[00101] In some embodiments, R20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R20a is C^CHiCH,):. In some embodiments, R20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci- 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl
Figure imgf000036_0001
Figure imgf000036_0002
some embodiments, the C3-10 cycloalkyl is a 3-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered
Figure imgf000036_0003
embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R20a is Ci-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is Ci-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted Ci- 4 alkyl.
[00102] In some embodiments, the compound is of the Formula (Ulf) :
Figure imgf000036_0004
Formula (Ulf), wherein
R21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
R20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1.4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)- (C1-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1.4 heteroalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Cn
3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, amidinyl, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonylamino, Cn
4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1.4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, wherein each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[00103] In some embodiments, R20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R20a is C^CHICH,):. In some embodiments, R20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Cn 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments,
Figure imgf000037_0002
membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered
Figure imgf000037_0001
embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted C 1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted Ci- 4 alkyl.
[00104] In some embodiments, the compound is of the Formula (Illg):
Figure imgf000038_0001
Formula (Illg), wherein
R21 has the meaning defined in Formula (I);
R20a is selected from the group consisting of H, OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C2-
4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 hydroxyalkyl, C1.4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)- (C1-4 alkoxy), -(C1.4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, C1.4 heteroalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(Ci-
3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, amidinyl, amino, C1-4 alkylamino, di(Ci.
4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, C1-4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonylamino, Ci-
4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, C1-4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, C1.4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, and di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, wherein each of the cycloalkyl and heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents independently selected from halo, CN, SH, -CN, oxo, NO2, OH, C1-4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1.4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1-4 aminoalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, C1-4 alkoxy, and amino, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
[00105] In some embodiments, R20a is methyl. In some embodiments, R20a is ethyl. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2OH. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH2F. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CHF2. In some embodiments, R20a is CH2CH( 013)2. In some embodiments, R20a is 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci- 3 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(C1-3 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is -(Ci-3 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl. In some embodiments,
Figure imgf000039_0002
membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, the 4-10 membered
Figure imgf000039_0001
embodiments, the 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl is a 4-5 membered ring, which is optionally substituted. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is C1-4 alkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted C 1.4 heteroalkyl. In some embodiments, R20a is optionally substituted Cn 4 alkyl.
[00106] In some embodiments, the compound is selected from Table 1.
[00107] In some embodiments, a SMSM described herein, possesses one or more stereocenters and each stereocenter exists independently in either the R or S configuration. The compounds presented herein include all diastereomeric, enantiomeric, and epimeric forms as well as the appropriate mixtures thereof. The compounds and methods provided herein include all cis, trans, syn, anti, entgegen (E), and zusammen (Z) isomers as well as the appropriate mixtures thereof. In certain embodiments, compounds described herein are prepared as their individual stereoisomers by reacting a racemic mixture of the compound with an optically active resolving agent to form a pair of diastereoisomeric compounds/salts, separating the diastereomers and recovering the optically pure enantiomers. In some embodiments, resolution of enantiomers is carried out using covalent diastereomeric derivatives of the compounds described herein. In another embodiment, diastereomers are separated by separation/re solution techniques based upon differences in solubility. In other embodiments, separation of stereoisomers is performed by chromatography or by the forming diastereomeric salts and separation by recrystallization, or chromatography, or any combination thereof (See, for example, Jean Jacques, Andre Collet, Samuel H. Wilen, “Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1981.) In one aspect, stereoisomers are obtained by stereoselective synthesis.
[00108] In some embodiments, compounds described herein are prepared as prodrugs. A “prodrug” refers to an agent that is converted into the parent drug in vivo. Prodrugs are often useful because, in some situations, they may be easier to administer than the parent drug. They may, for instance, be bioavailable by oral administration whereas the parent is not. The prodrug may also have improved solubility in pharmaceutical compositions over the parent drug. In some embodiments, the design of a prodrug increases the effective water solubility. An example, without limitation, of a prodrug is a compound described herein, which is administered as an ester (the “prodrug”) to facilitate transmittal across a cell membrane where water solubility is detrimental to mobility, but which then is metabolically hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid, the active entity, once inside the cell where watersolubility is beneficial. A further example of a prodrug might be a short peptide (polyaminoacid) bonded to an acid group where the peptide is metabolized to reveal the active moiety. In certain embodiments, upon in vivo administration, a prodrug is chemically converted to the biologically, pharmaceutically or therapeutically active form of the compound. In certain embodiments, a prodrug is enzymatically metabolized by one or more steps or processes to the biologically, pharmaceutically or therapeutically active form of the compound.
[00109] In one aspect, prodrugs are designed to alter the metabolic stability or the transport characteristics of a drug, to mask side effects or toxicity, to improve the flavor of a drug or to alter other characteristics or properties of a drug. By virtue of knowledge of pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic processes and drug metabolism in vivo, once a pharmaceutically active compound is known, the design of prodrugs of the compound is possible, (see, for example, Nogrady (1985) Medicinal Chemistry A Biochemical Approach, Oxford University Press, New York, pages 388-392; Silverman (1992), The Organic Chemistry of Drug Design and Drug Action, Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, pages 352-401, Rooseboom et al., Pharmacological Reviews, 56:53-102, 2004; Aesop Cho, “Recent Advances in Oral Prodrug Discovery”, Annual Reports in Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 41, 395-407, 2006; T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series).
[00110] In some cases, some of the herein-described compounds may be a prodrug for another derivative or active compound.
[00111] In some embodiments, sites on the aromatic ring portion of compounds described herein are susceptible to various metabolic reactions Therefore incorporation of appropriate substituents on the aromatic ring structures will reduce, minimize or eliminate this metabolic pathway. In specific embodiments, the appropriate substituent to decrease or eliminate the susceptibility of the aromatic ring to metabolic reactions is, by way of example only, a halogen, or an alkyl group.
[00112] In another embodiment, the compounds described herein are labeled isotopically (e.g. with a radioisotope) or by other means, including, but not limited to, the use of chromophores or fluorescent moieties, bioluminescent labels, or chemiluminescent labels.
[00113] Compounds described herein include isotopically labeled compounds, which are identical to those recited in the various formulae and structures presented herein, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replaced by an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be incorporated into the present compounds include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, fluorine and chlorine, such as, for example, 2H, 3H, 13C, 14C, 15N, 18O, 17O, 35S, 18F, and 36C1. In one aspect, isotopically labeled compounds described herein, for example those into which radioactive isotopes such as 3H and 14C are incorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distribution assays. In one aspect, substitution with isotopes such as deuterium affords certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, such as, for example, increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements.
[00114] In additional or further embodiments, the compounds described herein are metabolized upon administration to an organism in need to produce a metabolite that is then used to produce a desired effect, including a desired therapeutic effect.
[00115] Compounds described herein may be formed as, and/or used as, pharmaceutically acceptable salts. The type of pharmaceutical acceptable salts, include, but are not limited to: (1) acid addition salts, formed by reacting the free base form of the compound with a pharmaceutically acceptable: inorganic acid, such as, for example, hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, metaphosphoric acid, and the like; or with an organic acid, such as, for example, acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, trifluoroacetic acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methane sulfonic acid, ethane sulfonic acid, 1,2-ethanedisulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, 4-methylbicyclo-[2.2.2]oct-2-ene-l-carboxylic acid, glucoheptonic acid, 4,4 ’-methylenebis-(3 -hydroxy-2 -ene-1 -carboxylic acid), 3 -phenylpropionic acid, trimethylacetic acid, tertiary butylacetic acid, lauryl sulfuric acid, gluconic acid, glutamic acid, hydroxynaphthoic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, muconic acid, butyric acid, phenylacetic acid, phenylbutyric acid, valproic acid, and the like; (2) salts formed when an acidic proton present in the parent compound is replaced by a metal ion, e.g., an alkali metal ion (e.g. lithium, sodium, potassium), an alkaline earth ion (e.g. magnesium, or calcium), or an aluminum ion. In some cases, compounds described herein may coordinate with an organic base, such as, but not limited to, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, tromethamine, N-methylglucamine, dicyclohexylamine, tris(hydroxymethyl)methylamine. In other cases, compounds described herein may form salts with amino acids such as, but not limited to, arginine, lysine, and the like. Acceptable inorganic bases used to form salts with compounds that include an acidic proton, include, but are not limited to, aluminum hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, and the like. [00116] In some embodiments, the compounds provided herein can exist in unsolvated as well as solvated forms.
[00117] In some embodiments, a SMSM has a molecular weight of at most about 2000 Daltons, 1500 Daltons, 1000 Daltons or 900 Daltons. In some embodiments, a SMSM has a molecular weight of at least 100 Daltons, 200 Daltons, 300 Daltons, 400 Daltons or 500 Daltons. In some embodiments, a SMSM does not comprise a phosphodiester linkage. In some embodiments, a SMSM is a compound with a structure set forth in Table 1 below.
Table 1: Exemplary SMSM compounds
Figure imgf000042_0001
Figure imgf000043_0001
Figure imgf000044_0001
Figure imgf000045_0001
Pharmaceutical Compositions [00118] In some embodiments, the compounds described herein are formulated into pharmaceutical compositions. Pharmaceutical compositions are formulated in a conventional manner using one or more pharmaceutically acceptable inactive ingredients that facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations that can be used pharmaceutically. Proper formulation is dependent upon the route of administration chosen. A summary of pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be found, for example, in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Nineteenth Ed (Easton, Pa.: Mack Publishing Company, 1995); Hoover, John E., Remington’s Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pennsylvania 1975; Liberman, H.A. and Lachman, L., Eds., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Marcel Decker, New York, N.Y., 1980; and Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems, Seventh Ed. (Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 1999), herein incorporated by reference for such disclosure.
[00119] A pharmaceutical composition can be a mixture of a SMSM described herein with one or more other chemical components (i. e. , pharmaceutically acceptable ingredients), such as carriers, excipients, binders, fdling agents, suspending agents, flavoring agents, sweetening agents, disintegrating agents, dispersing agents, surfactants, lubricants, colorants, diluents, solubilizers, moistening agents, plasticizers, stabilizers, penetration enhancers, wetting agents, anti-foaming agents, antioxidants, preservatives, or one or more combination thereof. The pharmaceutical composition facilitates administration of the compound to an organism.
[00120] The compositions described herein can be administered to the subject in a variety of ways, including parenterally, intravenously, intradermally, intramuscularly, colonically, rectally, or intraperitoneally. In some embodiments, the small molecule splicing modulator, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered by intraperitoneal injection, intramuscular injection, subcutaneous injection, or intravenous injection of the subject. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions can be administered parenterally, intravenously, intramuscularly or orally. The oral agents comprising a small molecule splicing modulator can be in any suitable form for oral administration, such as liquid, tablets, capsules, or the like. The oral formulations can be further coated or treated to prevent or reduce dissolution in stomach. The compositions of the present disclosure can be administered to a subject using any suitable methods known in the art. Suitable formulations for use in the present disclosure and methods of delivery are generally well known in the art. For example, the small molecule splicing modulators described herein can be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent, carrier, or excipient. The compositions may contain pharmaceutically acceptable auxiliary substances as required to approximate physiological conditions including pH adjusting and buffering agents, tonicity adjusting agents, wetting agents and the like, such as, for example, sodium acetate, sodium lactate, sodium chloride, potassium chloride, calcium chloride, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate, etc. [00121] In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical formulation is in the form of a tablet. In other embodiments, pharmaceutical formulations containing a SMSM described herein are in the form of a capsule. In one aspect, liquid formulation dosage forms for oral administration are in the form of aqueous suspensions or solutions selected from the group including, but not limited to, aqueous oral dispersions, emulsions, solutions, elixirs, gels, and syrups.
[00122] For administration by inhalation, a SMSM described herein can be formulated for use as an aerosol, a mist, or a powder. For buccal or sublingual administration, the compositions may take the form of tablets, lozenges, or gels formulated in a conventional manner. In some embodiments, a SMSM described herein can be prepared as transdermal dosage forms. In some embodiments, a SMSM described herein can be formulated into a pharmaceutical composition suitable for intramuscular, subcutaneous, or intravenous injection. In some embodiments, a SMSM described herein can be administered topically and can be formulated into a variety of topically administrable compositions, such as solutions, suspensions, lotions, gels, pastes, medicated sticks, balms, creams, or ointments. In some embodiments, a SMSM described herein can be formulated in rectal compositions such as enemas, rectal gels, rectal foams, rectal aerosols, suppositories, jelly suppositories, or retention enemas.
[00123] In some embodiments, disclosed herein is a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the disclosure or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
Splicing Modulation of Target Gene Products
[00124] The present disclosure contemplates use of small molecules with favorable drug properties that modulate the activity of splicing of a target RNA. Provided herein are small molecule splicing modulators (SMSMs) that modulate splicing of a polynucleotide. In some embodiments, the SMSMs bind and modulate target RNA. In some embodiments, provided herein is a library of SMSMs that bind and modulate one or more target RNAs. In some embodiments, the target RNA is mRNA. In some embodiments, the target RNA is a noncoding RNA. In some embodiments, the target RNA is a pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, the target RNA is hnRNA. In some embodiments, the small molecules modulate splicing of the target RNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates splicing at a sequence of the target RNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates splicing at a cryptic splice site sequence of the target RNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates splicing at an alternative splice site sequence of the target RNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates splicing at a native splice site sequence of the target RNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein binds to a target RNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein binds to a splicing complex or a component thereof. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein binds to a target RNA and a splicing complex or a component thereof. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates binding affinity of a splicing complex component to a target RNA such as a pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates binding affinity of a splicing complex component to a target RNA such as a pre-mRNA at a splice site sequence. In some embodiments, a small molecule provided herein modulates binding affinity of a splicing complex component to a target RNA such as a pre-mRNA upstream of a splice site sequence or downstream of a splice site sequence.
[00125] Described herein are compounds modifying splicing of gene products, such as Ataxin 3 pre- mRNA for use in the treatment, prevention, and/or delay of progression of diseases or conditions. [00126] In some embodiments, described herein, is a method of treating, preventing, delaying of progress, or ameliorating symptoms of a disease or a condition associated with Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) expression level or activity level in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a small molecule splicing modulator (SMSM), wherein the SMSM binds to a pre-mRNA encoded by ATXN3 and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of the subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA.
[00127] In some embodiments, described herein is a method of treating, preventing, delaying of progress, or ameliorating symptoms of a disease or a condition associated with Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) expression level or activity level in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or salt of Formula (I). In some embodiments, described herein is a method of modulating splicing of a Ataxin3 (ATXN3) pre-mRNA, comprising contacting a compound or salt of Formula (I) to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA with a splice site sequence or cells comprising the ATXN3 pre-mRNA, wherein the compound binds to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of a subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, described herein is use of a compound of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a condition or disease associated with Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) expression level or activity level.
[00128] In some embodiments, the spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA undergoes non-sense mediated decay (NMD) and/or nuclear retention. In some embodiments, the nonsense-mediated decay (NMD) and/or nuclear retention of the spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA is promoted. In some embodiments, the nonsense -mediated decay (NMD) and/or nuclear retention of the spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA is increased compared to a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre- mRNA produced in the absence of the SMSM.
[00129] In some embodiments, described herein is a method of modulating splicing of a Ataxin3 (ATXN3) pre-mRNA, comprising contacting a small molecule splicing modulator (SMSM) to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA with a splice site sequence or cells comprising the ATXN3 pre-mRNA, wherein the SMSM binds to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of a subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA.
[00130] In some embodiments, described herein, is a method of modulating splicing of Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) pre-mRNA, comprising contacting a small molecule splicing modulator (SMSM) to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA with a splice site sequence or cells comprising the ATXN3 pre-mRNA, wherein the SMSM binds to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of a subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA, wherein the splice site sequence comprises UCCUAU/guaagauucugu.
[00131] In some embodiments, described herein, is a method of treating, preventing, delaying of progress, or ameliorating symptoms of a disease or condition associated with Ataxin 3 (ATXN3) expression level or activity level in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a small molecule splicing modulator (SMSM) to the subject, wherein the SMSM binds to a ATXN3 pre-mRNA with a splice site sequence and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of the subject, wherein a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre- mRNA undergoes nonsense -mediated decay (NMD), and wherein the splice site sequence comprises UCCUAU/guaagauucugu.
[00132] In some embodiments, the modulating splicing comprises modulating alternative splicing. In some embodiments, the modulating splicing comprises promoting exon skipping. In some embodiments, the modulating splicing comprises promoting exon inclusion. In some embodiments, the modulating splicing comprises modulating nonsense-mediated mRNA decay (NMD). In some embodiments, the modulating NMD comprises promoting NMD. In some embodiments, the modulating splicing comprises modulating nuclear retention of the spliced product of the pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, the modulating intron retention comprises promoting nuclear retention of the spliced product of the pre-mRNA.
[00133] In some embodiments, the splice site sequence is a native splice site sequence. In some embodiments, the native splice site is a canonical splice site. In some embodiments, the native splice site is an alternative splice site. In some embodiments, the alternative splice site comprises a 5’ splice site sequence. In some embodiments, the alternative splice site sequence comprises UCCUAU/guaagauucugu. In some embodiments, the SMSM induces splicing at the alternative splice site. In some embodiments, the splicing at the alternative splice site results in a frameshift in a downstream exon in the spliced product. In some embodiments, the downstream exon comprises an in-frame stop codon that is not in frame in the absence of splicing at the alternative splice site. In some embodiments, the in-frame stop codon in the downstream exon is at least 50 or at least 60 base pairs upstream of the 3’ end of the downstream exon. In some embodiments, the in-frame stop codon in the downstream exon is at least 50 or at least 60 base pairs upstream of a final exon-exon junction. [00134] In some embodiments, the splicing of the pre-mRNA at the alternative splice site promotes NMD of the spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, the spliced product comprises an alternative exon. In some embodiments, the SMSM promotes inclusion of the alternative exon in the spliced product. In some embodiments, the alternative exon comprises a poison exon. In some embodiments, the SMSM promotes inclusion of the poison exon in the spliced product. In some embodiments, the poison exon comprises an in-frame stop codon. In some embodiments, the in-frame stop codon is a premature termination codon. In some embodiments, the in-frame stop codon is at least 50 or 60 base pairs upstream of the 3’ end of the poison exon. In some embodiments, the inframe stop codon is less than 60 base pairs upstream of the 3 ’ end of the poison exon and wherein the exon immediately downstream of the poison exon is not the last exon in the pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, the sum of (a) the number of base pairs in the exon immediately downstream of the poison exon and (b) the number of base pairs between the premature termination codon in the poison exon and the 3’ end of the poison exon is at least 50 or at least 60.
[00135] In some embodiments, the cells comprise primary cells. In some embodiments, the cells comprise disease cells. In some embodiments, the SMSM modulates proliferation or survival of the cells. In some embodiments, the SMSM modulates the expression level of a protein encoded by the spliced product of the pre-mRNA in the cells.
Table 2. Exemplary targets for exon inclusion
Figure imgf000050_0001
Methods of Treatment
[00136] The compositions and methods described herein can be used for treating a human disease or disorder associated with aberrant splicing, such as aberrant pre-mRNA splicing. The compositions and methods described herein can be used for treating a human disease or disorder by modulating mRNA, such as pre-mRNA. In some embodiments, the compositions and methods described herein can be used for treating a human disease or disorder by modulating splicing of a nucleic acid even when that nucleic acid is not aberrantly spliced in the pathogenesis of the disease or disorder being treated.
[00137] In some embodiments, an effective amount in the context of the administration of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or composition or medicament thereof refers to an amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof to a patient which has a therapeutic effect and/or beneficial effect. In certain specific embodiments, an effective amount in the context of the administration of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or composition or medicament thereof to a patient results in one, two or more of the following effects: (i) reduces or ameliorates the severity of a disease; (ii) delays onset of a disease; (iii) inhibits the progression of a disease; (iv) reduces hospitalization of a subject; (v) reduces hospitalization length for a subject; (vi) increases the survival of a subject; (vii) improves the quality of life of a subject; (viii) reduces the number of symptoms associated with a disease; (ix) reduces or ameliorates the severity of a symptom associated with a disease; (x) reduces the duration of a symptom associated with a disease associated; (xi) prevents the recurrence of a symptom associated with a disease; (xii) inhibits the development or onset of a symptom of a disease; and/or (xiii) inhibits of the progression of a symptom associated with a disease. In some embodiments, an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to restore the amount of an RNA transcript of a gene to the amount of the RNA transcript detectable in healthy patients or cells from healthy patients. In other embodiments, an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to restore the amount an RNA isoform and/or protein isoform of a gene to the amount of the RNA isoform and/or protein isoform detectable in healthy patients or cells from healthy patients.
[00138] In some embodiments, an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to decrease the aberrant amount of an RNA transcript of a gene which associated with a disease. In some embodiments, an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to decrease the amount of the aberrant expression of an isoform of a gene. In some embodiments, an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to result in a substantial change in the amount of an RNA transcript (e.g., an mRNA transcript), alternative splice variant, or isoform.
[00139] In some embodiments, an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to increase the amount of an RNA transcript (e.g. , an mRNA transcript) of a gene that is beneficial for the prevention and/or treatment of a disease. In some embodiments, an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to increase the amount of an alternative splice variant of an RNA transcript of a gene that is beneficial for the prevention and/or treatment of a disease. In some embodiments, an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to increase the amount of an isoform of a gene that is beneficial for the prevention and/or treatment of a disease.
[00140] In some embodiments, an effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is an amount effective to decrease the amount of an RNA transcript (e.g. , an mRNA transcript) which causes or is related to the symptoms of the condition or disease. In particular embodiments, the SMSM decreases the amount of an RNA transcript that causes or relates to the symptoms of the condition or disease by modulating one or more splicing elements of the RNA transcript. In some embodiments, the SMSM promotes skipping of one or more exons. In some embodiments, the SMSM promotes inclusion of one or more exons. In some embodiments, the SMSM promotes inclusion of one or more exons and/or introns that relate to nonsense-mediated mRNA decay (NMD). In some embodiments, the one or more exons harbor a premature termination codon. In particular embodiments, the premature stop codon is an in-frame codon that does not cause frameshift of the downstream exon(s). In some embodiments, inclusion of the one or more exons causes a reading frameshift in a downstream exon, for example, in the immediately downstream exon, introducing a premature termination codon.
[00141] A method of treating a disease or a condition in a subject in need thereof can comprise administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound described herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof. In some embodiments, the present disclosure relates to a method for the treatment, prevention and/or delay of progression of a disease or a condition associated with a gene listed in Table 2.
[00142] Non-limiting examples of effective amounts of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof are described herein. For example, the effective amount may be the amount required to prevent and/or treat a disease associated with the aberrant amount of an mRNA transcript of gene in a human subject. In general, the effective amount will be in a range of from about 0.001 mg/kg/day to about 500 mg/kg/day for a patient having a weight in a range of between about 1 kg to about 200 kg. The typical adult subject is expected to have a median weight in a range of between about 70 and about 100 kg.
[00143] In one embodiment, a SMSM described herein can be used in the preparation of medicaments for the treatment of diseases or conditions described herein. In addition, a method for treating any of the diseases or conditions described herein in a subject in need of such treatment, can involve administration of pharmaceutical compositions that include at least one SMSM described herein or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, thereof, in a therapeutically effective amount to a subject. [00144] In certain embodiments, a SMSM described herein can be administered for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatments. In certain therapeutic applications, the compositions are administered to a patient already suffering from a disease or a condition, in an amount sufficient to cure or at least partially arrest at least one of the symptoms of the disease or the condition. Amounts effective for this use depend on the severity and course of the disease or the condition, previous therapy, the patient’s health status, weight, and response to the drugs, and the judgment of the treating physician. Therapeutically effective amounts are optionally determined by methods including, but not limited to, a dose escalation clinical trial. In prophylactic applications, compositions containing a SMSM described herein can be administered to a patient susceptible to or otherwise at risk of a particular disease, disorder, or condition.
Methods of Administering
[00145] The compositions described herein can be administered to the subject in a variety of ways, including parenterally, intravenously, intradermally, intramuscularly, colonically, rectally or intraperitoneally. In some embodiments, the small molecule splicing modulator (SMSM) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered by intraperitoneal injection, intramuscular injection, subcutaneous injection, or intravenous injection of the subject. In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions can be administered parenterally, intravenously, intramuscularly or orally. The oral agents comprising a small molecule splicing modulator can be in any suitable form for oral administration, such as liquid, tablets, capsules, or the like. The compositions of the present disclosure can be administered to a subject using any suitable methods known in the art. Suitable formulations for use in the present disclosure and methods of delivery are generally well known in the art. For example, the small molecule splicing modulators described herein can be formulated as pharmaceutical compositions with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent, carrier, or excipient.
Dosing and Schedules
[00146] The SMSMs utilized in the methods of the disclosure can be, e.g., administered at dosages that may be varied depending upon the requirements of the subject, the severity of the condition being treated and/or imaged, and/or the SMSM being employed. For example, dosages can be empirically determined considering the type and stage of disease diagnosed in a particular subject and/or the type of imaging modality being used in conjunction with the SMSMs. The dose administered to a subject, in the context of the present disclosure should be sufficient to affect a beneficial diagnostic or therapeutic response in the subject. The size of the dose also can be determined by the existence, nature, and extent of any adverse side-effects that accompany the administration of a SMSM in a particular subject.
[00147] Within the scope of the present description, the effective amount of a SMSM or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof for use in the manufacture of a medicament, the preparation of a pharmaceutical kit or in a method for preventing and/or treating a disease in a human subject in need thereof, is intended to include an amount in a range of from about 1 pg to about 50 grams. [00148] The compositions of the present disclosure can be administered as frequently as necessary. Subjects
[00149] The subjects that can be treated with the SMSMs and methods described herein can be any subject that produces mRNA that is subject to alternative splicing, e.g., the subject may be a eukaryotic subject, such as a plant or an animal. In some embodiments, the subject is a mammal, e.g. , human. In some embodiments, the subject is a human. In some embodiments, the subject is a nonhuman animal. In some embodiments, the subject is a fetus, an embryo, or a child. In some embodiments, the subject is a non-human primate such as chimpanzee, and other apes and monkey species; farm animals such as cattle, horses, sheep, goats, swine; domestic animals such as rabbits, dogs, and cats; laboratory animals including rodents, such as rats, mice and guinea pigs, and the like. [00150] In some embodiments, the subject is prenatal (e.g. , a fetus), a child (e.g. , a neonate, an infant, a toddler, a preadolescent), an adolescent, a pubescent, or an adult (e.g. , an early adult, a middle-aged adult, a senior citizen).
Methods of Making Compounds
[00151] Compounds described herein can be synthesized using standard synthetic techniques or using methods known in the art in combination with methods described herein. Unless otherwise indicated, conventional methods of mass spectroscopy, NMR, HPLC, protein chemistry, biochemistry, recombinant DNA techniques and pharmacology can be employed. Compounds can be prepared using standard organic chemistry techniques such as those described in, for example, March’s Advanced Organic Chemistry, 6th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, Inc. Alternative reaction conditions for the synthetic transformations described herein may be employed such as variation of solvent, reaction temperature, reaction time, as well as different chemical reagents and other reaction conditions. The starting materials can be available from commercial sources or can be readily prepared. By way of example only, provided are schemes for preparing the SMSMs described herein. [00152] Suitable reference books and treatise that detail the synthesis of reactants useful in the preparation of compounds described herein, or provide references to articles that describe the preparation, include for example, “Synthetic Organic Chemistry”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York; S. R. Sandler et al., “Organic Functional Group Preparations,” 2nd Ed., Academic Press, New York, 1983; H. O. House, “Modem Synthetic Reactions”, 2nd Ed., W. A. Benjamin, Inc. Menlo Park, Calif. 1972; T. L. Gilchrist, “Heterocyclic Chemistry”, 2nd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1992; J. March, “Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions, Mechanisms and Structure”, 4th Ed., Wiley Interscience, New York, 1992. Additional suitable reference books and treatise that detail the synthesis of reactants useful in the preparation of compounds described herein, or provide references to articles that describe the preparation, include for example, Fuhrhop, J. and Penzlin G. “Organic Synthesis: Concepts, Methods, Starting Materials”, Second, Revised and Enlarged Edition (1994) John Wiley & Sons ISBN: 3 527-29074-5; Hoffman, R.V. “Organic Chemistry, An Intermediate Text” (1996) Oxford University Press, ISBN 0-19-509618-5; Larock, R. C. “Comprehensive Organic Transformations: A Guide to Functional Group Preparations” 2nd Edition (1999) Wiley- VCH, ISBN: 0-471-19031-4; March, J. “Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions, Mechanisms, and Structure” 4th Edition (1992) John Wiley & Sons, ISBN: 0-471-60180-2; Otera, J. (editor) “Modem Carbonyl Chemistry” (2000) Wiley-VCH, ISBN: 3-527-29871-1; Patai, S. “Patai’s 1992 Guide to the Chemistry of Functional Groups” (1992) Interscience ISBN: 0-471-93022-9; Solomons, T. W. G. “Organic Chemistry” 7th Edition (2000) John Wiley & Sons, ISBN: 0-471-19095-0; Stowell, J.C., “Intermediate Organic Chemistry” 2nd Edition (1993) Wiley-Interscience, ISBN: 0-471-57456-2; “Industrial Organic Chemicals: Starting Materials and Intermediates: An Ullmann’s Encyclopedia” (1999) John Wiley & Sons, ISBN: 3-527-29645-X, in 8 volumes; “Organic Reactions” (1942-2000) John Wiley & Sons, in over 55 volumes; and “Chemistry of Functional Groups” John Wiley & Sons, in 73 volumes.
[00153] In the reactions described, it may be necessary to protect reactive functional groups, for example hydroxy, amino, imino, thio or carboxy groups, where these are desired in the final product, in order to avoid their unwanted participation in reactions. A detailed description of techniques applicable to the creation of protecting groups and their removal are described in Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 3rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY, 1999, and Kocienski, Protective Groups, Thieme Verlag, New York, NY, 1994, which are incorporated herein by reference for such disclosure).
[00154] SMSMs can be made using known techniques and further chemically modified, in some embodiments, to facilitate intranuclear transfer to, e.g., a splicing complex component, a spliceosome or a pre-mRNA molecule. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate the standard medicinal chemistry approaches for chemical modifications for intranuclear transfer (e.g., reducing charge, optimizing size, and/or modifying lipophilicity).
[00155] General Synthesis Scheme 1 (R24 being Hydrogen or alkyls).
Figure imgf000056_0001
EXAMPLES
[00157] These examples are provided for illustrative purposes only and not to limit the scope of the claims provided herein. The starting materials and reagents used for the synthesis of the compounds described herein may be synthesized or can be obtained from commercial sources, such as, but not limited to, Sigma-Aldrich, Acros Organics, Fluka, and Fisher Scientific.
[00158] Example Al. Synthesis of Intermediates of type 8 [00159] Intermediate 8-1: tert-butyl (6-bromo-2-chloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4- yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate
Figure imgf000057_0001
[00160] Step l : Into a 500-mL round bottom flask purged and maintained with an inert atmosphere of nitrogen were added ethyl 5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2 -carboxylate (20 g, 130.5 mmol, 1 eq.), NBS (23.2 g, 130.5 mmol, 1 eq.) and DCM (200 mL) at 0°C. The resulting solution was stirred for 2h at RT. The resulting mixture was extracted with DCM (3 x 300 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (3x300 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by trituration with MeOH (100 mL) to afford ethyl 4-bromo-5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2-carboxylate (20 g, 66%) as a white solid.
[00161] Step 2 : A solution of ethyl 4-bromo-5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2-carboxylate (20 g, 86.2 mmol, 1 eq.) in THF (200 ml) was treated with sodium hydride (4.14 g, 172.4 mmol, 2 eq.) for 2 h at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere followed by the addition of O-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)hydroxylamine (25.74 g, 129.3 mmol, 1.5 eq.) in portions at RT. The resulting mixture was stirred for 2h at RT. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2x100 mL). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (5: 1) to afford ethyl l-amino-4-bromo-5-methylpyrrole-2 -carboxylate (13.5 g, 63%) as a yellow semi-solid. [00162] Step 3 : A solution of ethyl l-amino-4-bromo-5-methylpyrrole-2 -carboxylate (13.5 g, 54.65 mmol, 1 eq.) and ethyl 3-chloro-3-oxopropanoate (9.87 g, 65.5 mmol, 1.2 eq.), pyridine (8.64 g, 109.3 mmol, 2 eq.) in DCM (200 ml) was stirred for 2h at RT. The aqueous layer was extracted with DCM (2x100 mL). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (5: 1) to afford ethyl 4-bromo-l-(3- ethoxy-3-oxopropanamido)-5-methylpyrrole-2 -carboxylate (7.5 g, 38%) as a light yellow semi-solid. [00163] Step 4 : A solution of ethyl 4-bromo-l-(3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanamido)-5-methylpyrrole-2- carboxylate (7.5 g, 20.7 mmol, 1 equiv) and t-BuOK (4.66 g, 41.5 mmol, 2 equiv) in THF (lOOmL) was stirred for 4h at room temperature. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The resulting mixture containing ethyl 6-bromo-7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-3- carboxylate was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00164] Step 5: A solution of ethyl 6-bromo-7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-3- carboxylate (5 g, 15.8 mmol, 1 eq.) and NaOH (3.173 g, 79 mmol, 5 eq.) in 1,4-dioxane : water (1: 1) (lOOmL) was stirred for 16h at 80°C. The mixture was acidified to pH 7 with cone. HC1. The precipitated solids were collected by filtration. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography (column, Cl 8; mobile phase, MeCN in water (0.1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm) to yield 6-bromo-7-methyl-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-2, 4-dione (2.8 g, 73%) as a brown solid.
[00165] Step 6 : A solution of 6-bromo-7-methyl-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-2, 4-dione (2.8 g, 11.5 mmol, 1 eq.) and DIEA (2.9g, 23.0 mmol, 2 eq.) in POCE (30mL) was stirred for 3 days at 125°C. The mixture was acidified to pH 7 with cone. HC1. The precipitated solids were collected by filtration. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography (column, Cl 8; mobile phase, MeCN in Water (0. 1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm) to yield 6- bromo-2,4-dichloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (200 mg, 6.2%) as a light yellow solid.
[00166] Step 7: A solution of 6-bromo-2,4-dichloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (200 mg, 0.714 mmol, 1 eq.) and l-(thiophen-2-yl)methanamine (82.5 mg, 0.728 mmol, 1.02 eq.), DIEA (185 mg, 1.428 mmol, 2 eq.) in DMSO (3mL) was stirred for 8h at 100°C. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography (column, C18; mobile phase, MeCN in water (0.1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm) to yield 6-bromo-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2- ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (160 mg, 63%) as an orange oil.
[00167] Step 8 : A solution of 6-bromo-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2- b]pyridazin-4-amine (160 mg, 0.449 mmol, 1 eq.) and BOC2O (196 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 eq.), DMAP (109 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 eq.), TEA (91 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 eq.) in DCM (3ml) was stirred for 2h at RT. The resulting mixture was diluted with water (20mL). The resulting mixture was extracted with CH2CI2 (2 x 20mL). The combined organic layers were washed with NaCl (1x10 mb), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography (column, C18; mobile phase, MeCN in water (0. 1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm) to yield tert-butyl (6-bromo-2- chloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (180 mg, 88%) as an orange oil.
[00168] Intermediate 8-2: tert-butyl (6-bromo-2-chloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2- ylmethyl)carbamate
Figure imgf000058_0001
[00169] In analogy to the preparation of the intermediate 8-1, starting from methyl 4-bromo-lH- pyrrole-2-carboxylate in the second step, was prepared tert-butyl (6-bromo-2-chloropyrrolo[l,2- b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate as a light yellow solid.
[00170] Intermediate 8-3: tert-butyl (6-bromo-2,7-dichloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2- ylmethyl)carbamate
Figure imgf000059_0001
[00171] Step l : To a stirred mixture of 6-bromo-2,4-dichloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (compound obtained in the course of the preparation of the intermediate 8-2) (200 mg, 0.752 mmol, 1 eq.) in TFA (5 mb) was added NCS (120 mg, 0.902 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in portions at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for lOmin at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was diluted with CH2CI2 (10 mL). The reaction was quenched by the addition of water (20mL) at 0°C. The resulting mixture was extracted with CH2Q2 (3 x 20mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (1x10 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. After fdtration, the fdtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography (column, Cl 8; mobile phase, MeCN in water (lOmmol/L NH4HCO3), 20% to 100% gradient in 25 min; detector, UV 254 nm) to yield 6-bromo-2,4,7-trichloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (170 mg, 75%) as a yellow solid.
[00172] Step 2 : To a stirred solution of 6-bromo-2,4,7-trichloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (200 mg, 0.666 mmol, 1 eq.) and l-(thiophen-2-yl)methanamine (90 mg, 0.799 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in DMSO (10 mL) was added DIEA (172 mg, 1.332 mmol, 2 eq.) dropwise at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 5h at 100°C under air atmosphere. The mixture was allowed to cool down to RT. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography (column, Cl 8; mobile phase, MeCN in water (lOmmol/L NH4HCO3), 20% to 100% gradient in 25 min; detector, UV 254 nm) to yield 6-bromo-2,7-dichloro-N-(thiophen-2-yhnethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (200 mg, 80%) as a white solid.
[00173] Step 3 : To a stirred solution of 6-bromo-2,7-dichloro-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2- b]pyridazin-4-amine (400 mg, 1.061 mmol, 1 eq.) in DCM (10 mL, 157 mmol, 148 eq.) was added DMAP (12.9 mg, 0.106 mmol, 0.1 eq.) and di-tert-butyl dicarbonate (347 mg, 1.591 mmol, 1.5 eq.) in portions at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 3h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (10: 1) to afford tert-butyl (6-bromo-2,7- dichloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (400 mg, 79%) as a yellow solid.
[00174] Example A2. Synthesis of potassium trifluoroborate salts
[00175] Borate salt 1 : Potassium (S)-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)propyl )trifluoroborate
Figure imgf000060_0001
[00176] Step l : To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-hydroxypropan-2-yl]carbamate (10 g, 57.07 mmol, 1 eq.) and triphenylphosphine (18.01 g, 64.48 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in THF (100 mb) and DCM (100 mb) was added NBS (12.19 g, 68.48 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in portions at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at RT under nitrogen atmosphere. The residue was diluted with DCM (200 mb) and washed with water (2x100 mb). The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (5: 1) to afford tert-butyl N-[(2S)-1 -bromopropan -2 -yl]carbamate (6 g, 44%) as a light yellow solid.
[00177] Step 2 : A mixture of tert-butyl N-(l-bromopropan-2-yl)carbamate (4 g, 16.80 mmol, 1 eq.), copper(I) iodide (0.32 g, 1.68 mmol, 0.1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (0.44 g, 1.68 mmol, 0.13 eq.), 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-l,3,2-dioxaborolane (5.55 g, 21.84 mmol, 1.3 eq.) and methoxylithium (0.83 g, 21.84 mmol, 1.3 eq.) in dimethylformamide (80 mb) was stirred for 16 h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was diluted with water (200mL) and extracted with tert-Butyl methyl ether (3x100 mL). The organic phase was concentrated under vacuum. The crude product was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00178] Step 3 : To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[l-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2- yl)propan-2-yl] carbamate (4 g, 14.03 mmol, 1 eq.) in with tert-Butyl methyl ether (40 mL) was added KHF2 (2.19 g, 28.05 mmol, 2 eq.) and water (1 mL) at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight and the resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was diluted with tert-Butyl methyl ether (100 mL). The mixture was stirred for 30 min and filtered. The filter cake was diluted with acetone (300 mL) and stirred for another 30 min. The resulting mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford potassium (.8)- (2-((/ -butoxycarbonyl)amino)propyl)trifliioroboratc (2 g, 54%) as a light yellow solid. The crude product was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00179] Borate salt 2: Potassium (R)-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3- methoxypropyl)trifluoroborate
Figure imgf000060_0002
[00180] Step l : To an ice-cooled solution of (2S)-2-[(tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino]-3- methoxypropanoic acid (5 g, 22.81 mmol, 1 eq.) and DIEA (3.54 g, 27.37 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in THF (40 m ) was added isopropyl chloroformate (3.07 g, 25.09 mmol, 1.1 eq.) dropwise. The cooling bath was removed and the mixture was stirred at 23 °C for 2 h. The mixture was fdtered to remove the white precipitate, and the fdtrate was treated with NaBH (1.73 g, 45.61 mmol, 2 eq.) resulting in vigorous gas evolution. After the mixture was stirred at RT for 2 h, brine (25 m ) was added. The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 25 mb). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgSCh), filtered, then concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel flash chromatography to give tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-hydroxy-3-methoxypropan-2-yl]carbamate (2.5 g, 53%) as a white solid.
[00181] Step 2 : To a stirred solution of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-hydroxy-3-methoxypropan-2- yl]carbamate (2.5 g, 12.180 mmol, 1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (5.91 g, 22.53 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in THF (8 mb) and DCM (40 mb) were added NBS (4.01 g, 22.53 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in portions at -20°C under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for additional overnight at RT. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (10: 1) to afford tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-bromo-3-methoxypropan- 2-yl]carbamate (1.2 g, 37%) as a white oil.
[00182] Step 3 : A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-bromo-3-methoxypropan-2-yl]carbamate (1.2 g, 4.47 mmol, 1 eq.) copper(I) iodide (0.09 g, 0.448 mmol, 0.1 eq.) methoxylithium (0.34 g, 8.950 mmol, 2 eq.) triphenylphosphine (0.15 g, 0.582 mmol, 0.13 eq.) and 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5- tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-l,3,2-dioxaborolane (1.71 mb, 5.817 mmol, 1.3 equiv) in DMF (11 mb) was stirred for overnight at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was filtered, the filter cake was washed with water and tert-Butyl methyl ether (3x20 mb). The resulting mixture was extracted with MTBE (3 x 100 mb). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (1x50 mb), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00183] Step 4: A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-methoxy-3-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)propan-2-yl]carbamate (1.2 g, 3.807 mmol, 1 eq.) and KHF2 (0.59 g, 7.614 mmol, 2 eq.) in 2-methoxy-2 -methylpropane (100 mb) was stirred for overnight at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by trituration with MTBE (300 mb). The mixture was stirred for 30 min and filtered. The filter cake was suspended with acetone (400 mb) and stirred for another 30 min. The resulting mixture was filtered, and the filter cake was washed with acetone (1x50 mb). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. This resulted in potassium (R)-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3- methoxypropyl)trifluoroborate (500 mg, 51%) as a white solid.
[00184] Borate salt 3: Potassium ((2R,3S)-2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3- fluorobutyl)trifluoroborate
Figure imgf000062_0001
[00185] Step 1: To a stirred solution of imidazole (144.76 g, 2126.348 mmol, 4 equiv) in DCM (3720 mL) were added SOCI2 (57.84 mL, 797.38 mmol, 1.5 equiv) and DIEA (185.19 mL, 1063.17 mmol, 2 eq.) dropwise at 0°C. The resulting mixture was stirred for 0.5h at OoC. To the above mixture was added methyl (2S,3R)-2-[(tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino]-3-hydroxybutanoate (124 g, 531.587 mmol, 1 eq.) in DCM (620ml) dropwise at 0°C. The resulting mixture was stirred for additional overnight at RT. The resulting mixture was washed with 3 x 800 mL of HC1 (0.5M). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00186] Step 2 : A solution of 3 -(tert-butyl) 4-methyl (4S,5R)-5-methyl-l,2,3-oxathiazolidine-3,4- dicarboxylate 2-oxide (144 g, 515.55 mmol, 1 eq.) in H2O (1008 mL) and acetonitrile (1872 mL) was treated withNalCL (132.33 g, 618.66 mmol, 1.2 eq.) and ruthenium(iv) oxide hydrate (1.56 g, 10.31 mmol, 0.02 eq.) at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for Ih at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was filtered, the filter cake was washed with EtOAc (5 x 1000 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (1: 1) to provide 3 -(tert-butyl) 4- methyl (4S,5R)-5-methyl-l,2,3-oxathiazolidine-3,4-dicarboxylate 2,2-dioxide (145 g, 95%) as alight yellow oil.
[00187] Step 3 : A solution of 3 -(tert-butyl) 4-methyl (4S,5R)-5-methyl-l,2,3-oxathiazolidine-3,4- dicarboxylate 2,2-dioxide (144 g, 487.62 mmol, 1 eq.) in THE (975 mL) was treated with EtsN.sHF (430.11 mL, 3169.55 mmol, 6.5 eq.) at 60°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 3 days at 60°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The mixture was neutralized to pH 7 withNaOH (20%). The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 800 mL). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (1: 1) to afford methyl (2R,3S)-2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-fluorobutanoate (55 g, 48%) as a light yellow oil.
[00188] Step 4 : A solution of methyl (2R,3S)-2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-fluorobutanoate (55 g, 233.79 mmol, 1 eq.) in EtOH (500 mL) was treated withNaBEL (22.11 g, 584.47 mmol, 2.5 eq.) at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at
0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The reaction was quenched by the addition ofWater/Ice (500mL) at 0°C. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3x400mL). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (1: 1) to afford tert-butyl N-[(2R,3S)-3 -fluoro- l-hydroxybutan-2-yl] carbamate (46 g, 95%) as a yellow solid.
[00189] Step 5 : To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R,3S)-3-fluoro-l-hydroxybutan-2- yl]carbamate (44 g, 212.31 mmol, 1 eq.) and triphenylphosphine (103.02 g, 392.77 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in THF (170 mb) and DCM (880 mb) was added NBS (69.91 g, 392.77 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in portions at - 20°C under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was washed with 1x500 mb of water, washed with brine (1x200 mb) and dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (10: 1) to afford tertbutyl N-[(2S,3S)-l-bromo-3-fluorobutan-2-yl]carbamate (30 g, 52%) as a light yellow solid.
[00190] Step 6 : A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2S,3S)-l-bromo-3-fluorobutan-2-yl]carbamate (15.2 g, 56.27 mmol, 1 eq.), copper(I) iodide (1.07 g, 5.63 mmol, 0.1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (1.92 g, 7.31 mmol, 0.13 eq.), 4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-l,3,2- dioxaborolane (18.57 g, 73.15 mmol, 1.3 eq.) and methoxylithium (4.27 g, 112.53 mmol, 2 eq.) in DMF (150 mb) was stirred for 16h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was diluted with water (500mb). The resulting mixture was filtered, the filter cake was washed with MTBE (1x100 mb). The resulting mixture was extracted with MTBE (3 x300 mb). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (2x100 mb), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting mixture was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00191] Step 7: A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R,3S)-3-fluoro-l-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)butan-2-yl] carbamate (15.2 g, 47.92 mmol, 1 eq.) and KHF2 (8.8 g, 112.67 mmol, 2.35 eq.) in MTBE (600 mb) and H2O (4 mb) was stirred for 16h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by trituration with MTBE. The mixture was stirred for 30 min and filtered. The filter cake was diluted with acetone (800 mb) and stirred for another 30 min. The resulting mixture was filtered, and the filter cake was washed with acetone (1x50 mb). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. This resulted in potassium ((2/?.3.S')-2-((/c/7-biitoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-fliiorobiityl)trifliioroboratc (8 g, 56%) as a white solid.
[00192] Borate salt 4: Potassium (R)-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-fluoropropyl)trifluoroborate
Figure imgf000063_0001
[00193] Step 1: To a stirred solution of Imidazole (96.79 g, 1421.71 mmol, 4 eq.) in DCM (3000 mL) were added SOCI2 (38.67 mL, 533.14 mmol, 1.5 eq.) and DIEA (123.82 mL, 710.85 mmol, 2 eq.) dropwise at 0°C. The resulting mixture was stirred for 0.5 h at 0°C. To the mixture was added tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-(benzyloxy)-3-hydroxypropan-2-yl]carbamate (100 g, 355.43 mmol, 1 eq.) in DCM (500 mL) dropwise at 0°C. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at RT. The resulting mixture was washed with 3x1000 mL ofHCl (0.5 mol/L) and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00194] Step 2 : A solution of tert-butyl (4R)-4-[(benzyloxy)methyl]-2-oxo-l,21ambda4,3- oxathiazolidine-3 -carboxylate (122 g, 372.63 mmol, 1 eq.) in H2O (854 mL) and acetonitrile (1586 mL) was treated with NaKL (95.64 g, 447.16 mmol, 1.2 eq.) and ruthenium(iv) oxide hydrate (1.13 g, 7.45 mmol, 0.02 eq.) at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for Ih at 0 °C. The resulting mixture was filtered, the filter cake was washed with EtOAc (4 x 1000 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (2: 1) to afford tert-butyl (4R)-4-[(benzyloxy)methyl]-2,2-dioxo- l,21ambda6,3-oxathiazolidine-3-carboxylate (117 g, 91%) as alight yellow solid.
[00195] Step 3: A solution oftert-butyl (4R)-4-[(benzyloxy)methyl]-2,2-dioxo-l,21ambda6,3- oxathiazolidine-3 -carboxylate (117 g, 340.72 mmol, 1 eq.) in THE (1725 mL) was treated with TBAF (340.72 mL, 340.720 mmol, 1 equiv) at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction was quenched by the addition of citric acid (10%) (1500 mL) at RT. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 1000 mL). The combined organic layers were concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (3: 1) to afford tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-(benzyloxy)-3-fluoropropan- 2-yl] carbamate (76 g, 79%) as a colorless oil.
[00196] Step 4 : A solution oftert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-(benzyloxy)-3-fluoropropan-2-yl]carbamate (76 g, 268.226 mmol, 1 equiv) in EtOAc (760 mL) was treated with Pd/C (15.2 g, 20%) at room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at 50°C under hydrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was filtered, the filter cake was washed with EtOAc (300 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (1:2) to afford tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-fluoro-3-hydroxypropan-2-yl]carbamate (49.8 g, 96%) as a colorless oil.
[00197] Step 5 : To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-fluoro-3-hydroxypropan-2-yl]carbamate (10.5 g, 54.34 mmol, 1 eq.) and triphenylphosphine (17.15 g, 65.21 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in DCM (100 mL) and THF (100 mL) was added NBS (11.62 g, 65.28 mmol, 1.2 eq.) in portions at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 16 h at room temperature under nitrogen atmosphere. The residue was washed with water (2x50 mL) and brine (50 mL). The organic layers were concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (4: 1) to afford tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-bromo-3-fluoropropan-2- yl]carbamate (3.5 g, 25%) as a yellow solid.
[00198] Step 6 : A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-bromo-3-fluoropropan-2-yl]carbamate (3.5 g, 13.66 mmol, 1 eq.), copper(I) iodide (0.26 g, 1.37 mmol, 0.1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (0.36 g, 1.37 mmol, 0.1 eq.), Bis(pinacolato) diboron (6.94 g, 27.33 mmol, 2 eq.) and methoxylithium (1.04 g, 27.33 mmol, 2 eq.) in DMF (60 mb) was stirred for 16 h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was diluted with water (60 mb) and extracted with MTBE (3 x 100 mb). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (1x50 mb), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After fdtration, the fdtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00199] Step 7: A mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-fluoro-3-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan- 2-yl)propan-2-yl]carbamate (5 g, 16.49 mmol, 1 eq.) and fluorine potassium hydride (2.57 g, 32.98 mmol, 2 eq.) in MTBE (200 mL) and H2O (2 mL) was stirred for 16 h at room temperature under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was diluted with MTBE (200 mL). The mixture was stirred for 30 min and filtered. The filter cake was diluted with acetone (300 mL) and stirred for another 30 min. The resulting mixture was filtered, and the filter cake was washed with acetone (1x50 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure to afford potassium (R)-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-fluoropropyl)trifluoroborate (3 g, 64%) as an off-white solid. The crude product was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00200] Borate salt 5: Potassium (R)-((3-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-2,2-dimethyloxazolidin-4- yl)methyl)trifluoroborate
Figure imgf000065_0001
[00201] Step 1: To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl (4R)-4-(hydroxymethyl)-2,2-dim ethyl- 1,3- oxazolidine-3 -carboxylate (11 g, 47.6 mmol, 1 eq.) and triphenylphosphine (23.08 g, 87.98 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in THF (44 mb) and DCM (220 mb) was added NBS (15.66 g, 87.98 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in portions at -20°C under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 16h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (10: 1) to afford tert-butyl (4S)-4-(bromomethyl)- 2,2-dimethyl-l,3-oxazolidine-3-carboxylate (2.5 g, 18%) as a colorless oil.
[00202] Step 2 : A mixture of tert-butyl (4S)-4-(bromomethyl)-2,2-dimethyl-l,3-oxazolidine-3- carboxylate (2.5 g, 8.50 mmol, 1 eq.), methoxylithium (0.65 g, 17.0 mmol, 2 eq.), copper(I) iodide (0.16 g, 0.85 mmol, 0.1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (0.29 g, 1.105 mmol, 0.13 eq.) and 4, 4,5,5- tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-l,3,2-dioxaborolane (2.81 g, 11.05 mmol, 1.3 eq.) in DMF (25 mb) was stirred overnight at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was diluted with water (100 mL), filtered, and the filter cake was washed with MTBE (2x30 mL). The filtrate was extracted with MTBE (2 x 80 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (1x30 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00203] Step 3: A mixture of tert-butyl (4R)-2,2-dimethyl-4-[(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2- dioxaborolan-2-yl)methyl]-l, 3 -oxazolidine-3 -carboxylate (2.5 g, 7.32 mmol, 1 eq.) and potassium bifluoride (1.14 g, 14.65 mmol, 2 eq.) in MTBE (250 mL) was stirred for overnight at room temperature under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by trituration with MTBE (100 mL). The mixture was stirred for 30 min and filtered. The filter cake was suspended with acetone (100 mL) and stirred for another 30 min. The resulting mixture was filtered, and the filter cake was washed with acetone (1x50 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. This resulted in potassium (R)-((3-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-2,2- dimethyloxazolidin-4-yl)methyl)trifluoroborate (1 g, 42.5%) as a white solid.
[00204] Borate salt 6: Potassium (R)-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3- (difluoromethoxy)propyl)trifluoroborate
Figure imgf000066_0001
[00205] Step 1: To a stirred solution of tert-butyl (4S)-4-(hydroxymethyl)-2,2-dimethyl-l,3- oxazolidine-3 -carboxylate (20 g, 86.471 mmol, 1 equiv) in DCM (800 mL) and H2O (800 mL) was added (bromodifluoromethyl) trimethylsilane (52.69 g, 259.41 mmol, 3 eq.) and potassium acetate (50.92 g, 518.83 mmol, 6 eq.) in portions at 10°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 24h at RT under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting mixture was extracted with CH2CI2 (3 x lOOmL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (1x50 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (4: 1) to afford tert-butyl (4R)-4-[(difluoromethoxy)methyl]-2,2- dimethyl-l,3-oxazolidine-3-carboxylate (21 g, 86.33%) as a yellow oil.
[00206] Step 2 : To a stirred solution of tert-butyl (4R)-4-[(difluoromethoxy)methyl]-2,2-dimethyl- l,3-oxazolidine-3-carboxylate (1 g, 3.55 mmol, 1 eq.) in MeCN (20 mL) and was added bismuth tribromide (1.28 g, 2.84 mmol, 0.2 eq.) in portions at 0°C under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for 2h at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was diluted with H2O (5mL). The resulting mixture was filtered, the filter cake was washed with MeCN (20 mL) (2x30 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (4: 1) to afford tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-(difluoromethoxy)-3- hydroxypropan-2-yl]carbamate (2.4 g, 70%) as a yellow oil.
[00207] Step 3 : To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-(difluoromethoxy)-3-hydroxypropan-2- yl]carbamate (1 g, 4.14 mmol, 1 eq.) and triphenylphosphine (2.01 g, 7.67 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in THF (4 mL) and DCM (20 mL) were added NBS (1.36 g, 7.67 mmol, 1.85 eq.) in portions at -20°C under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for overnight at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (10: 1) to afford tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-bromo-3- (difhioromethoxy)propan-2-yl]carbamate (380 mg, 30.14%) as a yellow oil.
[00208] Step 4 : To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2S)-l-bromo-3-(difluoromethoxy)propan-2- yl]carbamate (380 mg, 1.25 mmol, 1 eq.), methoxylithium (95 mg, 2.50 mmol, 2 eq.), copper(I) iodide (23.8 mg, 0.125 mmol, 0.1 eq.), triphenylphosphine (43 mg, 0.16 mmol, 0.13 eq.) and 4, 4, 5, 5- tetramethyl-2-(4,4,5,5-tetramethyl-l,3,2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)-l,3,2-dioxaborolane (412 mg, 1.62 mmol,
I.3 eq.) in DMF (4 mL) at room temperature under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred for overnight at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was diluted with water (lOOmL). The resulting mixture was filtered, the filter cake was washed with MTBE (3x10 mL). The resulting mixture was extracted with MTBE (3 x 20mL). The combined organic layers were washed with saturated salt solution (1x20 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00209] Step 5 : To a stirred mixture of tert-butyl N-[(2R)-l-(difluoromethoxy)-3-(4,4,5,5- tetramethyl-1, 3, 2-dioxaborolan-2-yl)propan-2-yl] carbamate (2 g, 5.69 mmol, 1 eq.) and KHF2 (0.89 g,
I I.39 mmol, 2 eq.) in H2O (2 mL) and MTBE (200 mL) at RT under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was stirred overnight at 25°C under air atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The residue was dissolved in MTBE (200mL). The precipitated solids were collected by filtration and washed with MTBE (3x10 mL). The residue was dissolved in acetone (200mL). The resulting mixture was filtered, the filter cake was washed with acetone (3x10 mL). The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. This resulted in potassium (R)-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)- 3-(difluoromethoxy)propyl)trifluoroborate (1.1 g, 58%) as a white solid.
General procedures
[00210] Cross coupling reaction between an intermediate of type 4 with a trifluoroborate salt [00211] A mixture of an intermediate 8 (1 eq.), a potassium trifluoroborate salt (1.5 eq.), Pd2(dba)s or Pd(Amphos)2C12 (0.1 eq.) and CS2CO3 (2 eq.) in Toluene / H2O (25/1) was stirred at 100 °C under a nitrogen atmosphere until completion of the reaction. The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, to afford the desired compound.
[00212] Example 1. Synthesis of (S)-6-(2-aminopropyl)-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2- ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 1)
Figure imgf000068_0001
[00213] Step 1 : Into a 500-mL round bottom flask purged and maintained with an inert atmosphere of nitrogen were added ethyl 5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2 -carboxylate (20 g, 130.5 mmol, 1 equiv), NBS (23.24 g, 130.5 mmol, 1 equiv) and DCM (200 mb) at 0°C. The resulting solution was stirred for 2h at room temperature. The resulting mixture was extracted with DCM (3 x 300 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with water (3x300 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by trituration with MeOH (100 mL) to afford ethyl 4-bromo-5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2 -carboxylate (20 g, 66%) as a white solid.
[00214] Step 2 : A solution of ethyl 4-bromo-5-methyl-lH-pyrrole-2-carboxylate (20 g, 86.2 mmol, 1 equiv) in THF (200 ml) was treated with sodium hydride (4.14 g, 172.4 mmol, 2 equiv) for 2 h at 0°C under nitrogen atmosphere followed by the addition of O-(2,4-dinitrophenyl)hydroxylamine (25.74 g, 129.3 mmol, 1.5 equiv) in portions at room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred for 2h at room temperature. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2x100 mL). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (5: 1) to afford ethyl l-amino-4-bromo-5-methylpyrrole-2- carboxylate (13.5 g, 63.4%) as a yellow semi-solid.
[00215] Step 3 : A solution of ethyl l-amino-4-bromo-5-methylpyrrole-2-carboxylate (13.5 g, 54.65 mmol, 1 equiv) and ethyl 3-chloro-3-oxopropanoate (9.87 g, 65.5 mmol, 1.2 equiv), Pyridine (8.64 g, 109.3 mmol, 2 equiv) in DCM (200 ml) was stirred for 2h at room temperature. The aqueous layer was extracted with DCM (2x100 mL). The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography, eluted with PE / EA (5: 1) to afford ethyl 4-bromo-l-(3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanamido)-5-methylpyrrole-2-carboxylate (7.5 g, 38%) as a light yellow semi-solid.
[00216] Step 4 : A solution of ethyl 4-bromo-l-(3-ethoxy-3-oxopropanamido)-5-methylpyrrole-2- carboxylate (7.5 g, 20.7 mmol, 1 equiv) and t-BuOK (4.66 g, 41.5 mmol, 2 equiv) in THF (lOOmL) was stirred for 4h at room temperature. The resulting mixture was concentrated under vacuum. The resulting mixture was used in the next step directly without further purification.
[00217] Step 5: A solution of ethyl 6-bromo-7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-3- carboxylate (5 g, 15.8 mmol, 1 equiv) and NaOH (3173.13 mg, 79 mmol, 5 equiv) in 1,4- dioxane:water (1: 1) (lOOmL) was stirred for 16h at 80°C. The mixture was acidified to pH 7 with cone. HC1. The precipitated solids were collected by filtration. The residue was purified by reversed- phase flash chromatography with the following conditions: column, C18; mobile phase, MeCN in Water (0.1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm. This resulted in 6-bromo-7- methyl-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-2, 4-dione (2.8 g, 72.6%) as a brown solid.
[00218] Step 6 : A solution of 6-bromo-7-methyl-lH,3H-pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine-2, 4-dione (2.8 g, 11.5 mmol, 1 equiv) and DIEA (2.9g, 23.0 mmol, 2 equiv) in POCI3 (30mL) was stirred for 3 days at 125°C. The mixture was acidified to pH 7 with cone. HC1. The precipitated solids were collected by filtration. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography with the following conditions: column, Cis; mobile phase, MeCN in Water (0.1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm. This resulted in 6-bromo-2,4-dichloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (200 mg, 6.2%) as a light yellow solid.
[00219] Step 7: A solution of 6-bromo-2,4-dichloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazine (200 mg, 0.714 mmol, 1 equiv) and l-(thiophen-2-yl)methanamine (82.5 mg, 0.728 mmol, 1.02 equiv), DIEA (185 mg, 1.428 mmol, 2 equiv) in DMSO (3mL) was stirred for 8h at 100°C. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography with the following conditions: column, Cis; mobile phase, MeCN in Water (0. 1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm. This resulted in 6- bromo-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2-yhnethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (160 mg, 62.8%) as an orange oil. [00220] Step 8 : A solution of 6-bromo-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2- b]pyridazin-4-amine (160 mg, 0.449 mmol, 1 equiv) and BOC2O (196 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 equiv), DMAP (109 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 equiv), TEA (91 mg, 0.898 mmol, 2 equiv) in DCM (3ml) was stirred for 2h at room temperature . The resulting mixture was diluted with water (20mL). The resulting mixture was extracted with CH2Q2 (2 x 20mL). The combined organic layers were washed with NaCl (1x10 m ), dried over anhydrous Na2SC>4 After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography with the following conditions: column, C18; mobile phase, MeCN in Water (0.1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm. This resulted in tert-butyl N-{6-bromo-2-chloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2- b]pyridazin-4-yl}-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (180 mg, 87.8%) as an orange oil.
[00221] Step 9 : A solution of tert-butyl N-{6-bromo-2-chloro-7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl}- N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (100 mg, 0.219 mmol, 1 equiv) and tert-butyl N-[(2S)-1- (trifluoroboranuidyl)propan-2-yl]carbamate (99 mg, 0.438 mmol, 2 equiv), potassium (S)-(2-((tert- butoxycarbonyl)amino)propyl)trifluoroborate (17 mg, 0.438 mmol, 2 equiv), butylbis[(3R,5S,7s)- adamantan-l-yl]phosphane (7.9 mg, 0.022 mmol, 0.1 equiv), Pd2(dba)s (20.0 mg, 0.022 mmol, 0.1 equiv), CS2CO3 (143 mg, 0.438 mmol, 2 equiv) in toluene:water (50: 1) (5 m ) was stirred for 2h at 100°C under nitrogen atmosphere. The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography with the following conditions: column, Cis; mobile phase, MeCN in Water (0.1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm. This resulted in tert-butyl N-{6-[(2S)-2-[(tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino]propyl]-2-chloro-7- methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl}-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (60 mg, 51.2%) as an orange solid.
[00222] Step 10: A solution of tert-butyl N-(6-{2-[(tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino]propyl}-2-chloro-7- methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (80 mg, 0.150 mmol, 1 equiv) and TFA (O.lmb) in DCM (2mb) was stirred for 2h at room temperature. The resulting mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography with the following conditions: column, Cis; mobile phase, MeCN in Water (0.1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm. This resulted in 6-(2-aminopropyl)-2- chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (15.3 mg, 30.5%). EC-MS (ES, m/z): [M+H]+ = 334.95.
[00223] Example 2. Alternate Synthesis of (S)-6-(2-aminopropyl)-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2- ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 1)
Figure imgf000071_0001
[00224] Step 1: Using the general cross coupling reaction between the tert-butyl (6-bromo-2-chloro- 7-methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (intermediate 8-1) and potassium (.S)-(2-((/crt-biitoxycarbonyl)amino)propyl)trifluoroboratc (borate salt 1) was obtained 60 mg of tert-butyl (5)-(6-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)propyl)-2-chloro-7-methylpyrrolo[ 1,2- b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate as an orange solid.
[00225] Step 2 : A solution of tert-butyl (S)-(6-(2-((tert-butoxycarbonyl)amino)propyl)-2-chloro-7- methylpyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (80 mg, 0.150 mmol, 1 eq.) and TFA (1 mb) in DCM (2mL) was stirred for 2h at RT. The residue was purified by reversed-phase flash chromatography (column, C18; mobile phase, MeCN in water (0.1% FA), 10% to 50% gradient in 10 min; detector, UV 254 nm) to yield (.S')-6-(2-aminopropyl)-2-chloro-7-mcthyl-N-(thiophcn-2- ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (15 mg, 31%). LC-MS-(ES, m/z): [M+H]+ = 334.95.
[00226] Example 3. Synthesis of (S)-6-(2-aminopropyl)-2,7-dichloro-N-(thiophen-2- ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 2)
Figure imgf000071_0002
[00227] In analogy to the preparation of example 2, but using in the first step tert-butyl (6-bromo- 2,7-dichloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (intermediate 8-3) was prepared 5 mg of (.S)-6-(2-aminopropyl)-2.7-dichloro-N-(thiophcn-2-ylmcthyl)pyrrolo| 1.2- b]pyridazin-4-amine. LC-MS-(ES, m/z): [M+H]+= 354.90.
[00228] Example 4. Synthesis of (R)-6-(2-amino-3-methoxypropyl)-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen- 2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 3)
Figure imgf000071_0003
[00229] In analogy to the preparation of example 2, but using in the first step potassium (R)-(2-((tert- butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-methoxypropyl)trifluoroborate (borate salt 2) was prepared 7 mg of (R)-6- (2-amino-3-methoxypropyl)-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4- amine. LC-MS-(ES, m/z): [M+H]+= 364.95.
[00230] Example 5. Synthesis of 6-((2R,3S)-2-amino-3-fhiorobutyl)-2-chloro-N-(thiophen-2- ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 4)
Figure imgf000072_0001
[00231] In analogy to the preparation of example 2, but using in the first step tert-butyl (6-bromo-2- chloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (intermediate 8-2) and potassium ((2/?.3.S')-2-((/e/7-biitoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-fliiorobiityl)trifliioroboratc (borate salt 3) was prepared 12 mg of 6-((2/?.3.S')-2-amino-3-fliiorobutyl)-2-chloro-N-(thiophcn-2-ylmcthyl)pyrrolo| 1.2- b]pyridazin-4-amine. LC-MS-(ES, m/z)'. [M+H]+= 353.00.
[00232] Example 6. Synthesis of (R)-6-(2-amino-3-fluoropropyl)-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2- ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 5)
Figure imgf000072_0002
[00233] In analogy to the preparation of example 2, but using in the first step potassium (R)-(2-((tert- butoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-fluoropropyl)trifluoroborate (borate salt 4) was prepared 6 mg of (/?)-6-(2- amino-3-fluoropropyl)-2-chloro-7-methyl-N-(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine.
LC-MS-(ES, m/z): [M+H]+= 352.95.
[00234] Example 7. Synthesis of 6-((2R,3S)-2-amino-3-fhiorobutyl)-2-chloro-7-methyl-N- (thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 6)
Figure imgf000072_0003
[00235] In analogy to the preparation of example 2, but using in the first step potassium ((2/?.3.S)-2- ((/e/7-biitoxycarbonyl)amino)-3-fliiorobiityl)trifliioroboratc (borate salt 3) was prepared 11 mg of 6- ((2/?.3.S)-2-ammo-3-fhiorobutyl)-2-chloro-7-mcthyl-N-(thiophcn-2-ylmcthyl)pyrrolo| l.2-b|pyridazin- 4-amine. LC-MS-(ES, m/z): [M+H]+= 366.90.
[00236] Example 8. Synthesis of (R)-6-(2-amino-3-fluoropropyl)-2-chloro-N-(thiophen-2- ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 7)
Figure imgf000073_0001
[00237] In analogy to the preparation of example 2, but using in the first step tert-butyl (6-bromo-2- chloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (intermediate 8-2) and potassium (/?)-(2-((/e/7-butoxy carbon l )a mo)-3 -fhioropropy I )trifluoroboratc (borate salt 4) was prepared 9 mg of (/?)-6-(2-ammo-3-fhioropropyl)-2-chloro-N-(thiophcn-2-ylmcthyl)pyrrolo| 1.2- b]pyridazin-4-amine. LC-MS-(ES, m/z '. [M+H]+= 338.90.
[00238] Example 9. Synthesis of (R)-2-amino-3-(2-chloro-7-methyl-4-((thiophen-2- ylmethyl)amino)pyrrolo [ 1 ,2-b]pyridazin-6-yl)propan- 1 -ol (Compound 8)
Figure imgf000073_0002
[00239] In analogy to the preparation of example 2, but using in the first step potassium (R)-((3-(tert- butoxycarbonyl)-2,2-dimethyloxazolidin-4-yl)methyl)trifluoroborate (borate salt 5) was prepared 9 mg of (R)-2-amino-3-(2-chloro-7 -methyl -4-((thiophen-2-yhnethyl)amino)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-6- yl)propan-l-ol. LC-MS-(ES, m/z): [M+H]+= 350.90.
[00240] Example 10. Synthesis of (R)-6-(2-amino-3-(difluoromethoxy)propyl)-2,7-dichloro-N- (thiophen-2-ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 9)
Figure imgf000073_0003
[00241] In analogy to the preparation of example 2, but using in the first step tert-butyl (6-bromo- 2,7-dichloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (intermediate 8-3) and potassium (J?)-(2-((tert-butoxy carbonyl )amino)-3 -(difluoromethoxy )propyl)trifluoroborate (borate salt 6) was prepared 4 mg of (/?)-6-(2-amino-3-(difluoromcthoxy)propyl)-2.7-dichloro-N-(thiophcn-2- ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine. LC-MS-(ES, m/z): [M+H]+= 421.05.
[00242] Example 11. Synthesis of (R)-6-(2-amino-3-fluoropropyl)-2,7-dichloro-N-(thiophen-2- ylmethyl)pyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-amine (Compound 10)
Figure imgf000074_0001
[00243] In analogy to the preparation of example 2, but using in the first step tert-butyl (6-bromo- 2,7-dichloropyrrolo[l,2-b]pyridazin-4-yl)(thiophen-2-ylmethyl)carbamate (intermediate 8-3) and potassium (/?)-(2-((/er/-butoxy carbonyl )a mo)-3 -fl tioropropy I )trifluoroboratc (borate salt 4) was prepared 5 mg of (/?)-6-(2-ammo-3-fhioropropyl)-2.7-dichloro-N-(thiophcn-2-ylmcthyl)pyrrolo| 1.2- b]pyridazin-4-amine. LC-MS-(ES, m/z): [M+H]+ = 372.85.
[00244] Example 12: ATXN3 Quantitative Splicing Assay.
[00245] Human neuroblastoma SK-N-MC cells were plated in 384-well plates at 20,000 cells/well. Twenty-four hours after plating, cells were treated with compounds for 24 h at appropriate concentrations ranging from 30 pM to 0.6 nM (0.3% DMSO). Treated cells were lysed in 15 pL of lysis buffer, and cDNA was synthesized using the Fast Advanced Cells-to-Ct kit. Two pL of each cDNA was used in qPCR reactions to confirm the exon 4 skipped transcripts of ATXN3. A second set of primers/probe E4E5 was used to detect the transcripts containing exon 4. The third set of primers/probe E8E9 was used to detect total gene level of ATXN3. The qPCR reactions were prepared in 384-well plates in 10 pL volume, using TaqMan™ Fast Advanced Master Mix with primers and probes shown in the table below. Reactions were run in a Quant Studio 6 qPCR instrument with default settings.
[00246] The primers and probes are listed below in Table 3. Table 3.
Figure imgf000075_0001
[00247] Example 13: ATXN3 total protein assay.
[00248] Human neuroblastoma SK-N-MC cells were seeded at 10,000 cells/well in 384 well plates one day prior to compound treatment. The concentrations of compounds were tested at appropriate doses ranging from 30 pM to 0.6 nM. After incubation for 48 hours, the cells were lysed with 25 pL of lysis buffer containing protease inhibitors, and total ATXN3 protein levels were assessed by Mesoscale Discovery (MSD) assay developed with one pair of anti-ATXN3 antibodies. The capture and detect antibodies were raised in mouse and rabbit respectively. Anti-rabbit MSD-ST antibody was used for secondary antibody.
[00249] ATXN3 recombinant protein was used for standards. The readouts were captured with 35 pL of MSD read buffer and multi-array 384-well high binding plates.
[00250] One plate replica was carried out for parallel viability testing by CellTiter Gio® 2.0 with a seeding density of 4,000 cells/well. Compounds were incubated for 48 hours. The viability readouts were carried out by Envision according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
[00251] Compounds were tested as outlined in Examples 12 and 13 above and the results are shown below in Table 4.
Table 4
* IC50/EC50 range (nM): 0.01 < A < 100; 101 < B < 500; 501 < C < 5000; 5001 < D < 10000; 10001 < E < 40,000.
Figure imgf000076_0001

Claims

CLAIMS WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A compound of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof:
Figure imgf000077_0001
Formula (I) wherein,
- R21 is thiophenyl, which is unsubstituted or substituted with 1, 2, or 3, independently selected R1A groups; each R1A is independently selected from halo, CN, NO2, Ci-e alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2- e alkynyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, -C(=O)OH, -C(=O)Ci-6 alkyl, -C(=O)Ci-6 haloalkyl, and - C(=O)Ci.6 alkoxy
- R23 is selected from the group consisting of H, azido, halo, CN, NO2, Ci-e alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2- e alkynyl, C1-6 heteroalkyl, -(C1-6 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(C1-6 alkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, -(C1-6 heteroalkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, -(C1-6 heteroalkylene)-4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl, ORa3, SRa3, C(=O)Rb3, C(=O)ORb3, NRc3Rd3, C(=O)NRc3Rd3, - OC(=O)NRc3Rd3, NRc3C(=O)Rb3, NRc3C(=O)ORb3, NRc3C(=O)NRc3Rd3, NRc3S(=O)2Rb3, NRc3S(=O)2NRc3Rd3, S(O)NRc3Rd3, and S(O)2NRc3Rd3, wherein the Ci-6 alkyl, C2.6 alkenyl, C2- e alkynyl, C1-6 heteroalkyl, C1-6 alkylene, C1-6 heteroalkylene, C3-10 cycloalkyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl are each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups;
- R24 is selected from the group consisting of H, azido, halo, CN, NO2, Ci-e alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2- e alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 4- 10 membered heterocycloalkyl, ORa4, C(=O)Rb4, C(=O)ORb4, NRc4Rd4, C(=O)NRc4Rd4, - OC(=O)NRc4Rd4, NRc4C(=O)Rb4, NRc4C(=O)ORb4, NRc4C(=O)NRc4Rd4, NRc4S(=O)2Rb4, NRc4S(=O)2NRc4Rd4, S(O)NRc4Rd4, and S(O)2NRc4Rd4, wherein the Ci-e alkyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2- e alkynyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl are each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups;
- each Ra3, Rb3, Rc3, Rd3, Ra4, Rb4, Rc4, and Rd4, is independently selected from the group consisting of H, C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C1-6 hydroxyalkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, Ci- e alkoxy, - (C1-6 alkylene)-Ci-6 alkoxy, C3-10 cycloalkyl, -(C1-6 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, Ce-
10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl, wherein the C1-6 alkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2-6 alkynyl, C3-10 cycloalkyl, -(C1-6 alkylene)-C3-io cycloalkyl, Ce-io aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl are each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups; or Rc3 and Rd3 together with the N atom to which they are connected, come together to form a 5-10 membered heteroaryl or 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl ring, each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups; or Rc4 and Rd4 together with the N atom to which they are connected, come together to form a 5-10 membered heteroaryl or 4-10 membered heterocycloalkyl ring, each optionally substituted by 1, 2, 3, or 4 independently selected R20 groups; and
- each R20 is independently selected from the group consisting of OH, SH, CN, NO2, halo, oxo, C1.4 alkyl, C2-4 alkenyl, C2-4 alkynyl, C1-4 haloalkyl, C1.4 cyanoalkyl, C1.4 hydroxyalkyl, Ci- 4 alkoxy, -(C1-4 alkyl)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), -(C1-4 alkoxy)-(Ci-4 alkoxy), C1.4 haloalkoxy, C3-6 cycloalkyl, phenyl, 5-6 membered heteroaryl, 4-6 membered heterocycloalkyl, amino, Ci- 4 alkylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)amino, carbamyl, C1.4 alkylcarbamyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamyl, carbamoyl, C1-4 alkylcarbamoyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)carbamoyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonyl, Ci-
4 alkoxycarbonyl, C1.4 alkylcarbonylamino, C1.4 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, Ci-
4 alkylaminosulfonyl, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, aminosulfonylamino, Ci-
4 alkylaminosulfonylamino, di(Ci-4 alkyl)aminosulfonylamino, aminocarbonylamino, Ci-
4 alkylaminocarbonylamino, di(Ci-4alkyl)aminocarbonylamino, and amidinyl.
2. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein each R1A is independently selected from C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 haloalkyl, and halo.
3. The compound of claim 1 or 2, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R1A is fluoro.
4. The compound of any one of claims 1 to 3, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R21 is selected from the group consisting of,
Figure imgf000078_0001
5. The compound of claim 1, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R21 is
Figure imgf000078_0002
6. The compound of any of the preceding claims, wherein R23 is substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted Ci-6 heteroalkyl.
7. The compound of claim 6, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, wherein R23 is CH2CHNH2CH3.
8. The compound of claim 6, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2OH.
9. The compound of claim 6, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R23 is CH2CHNH2CHFCH3.
10. The compound of claim 6, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2CH2OH.
11. The compound of claim 6, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2F.
12. The compound of claim 6, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2OCH3.
13. The compound of claim 12, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R23 is CH2CHNH2CH2OCD3.
14. The compound of any one of claims 1-13, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R24 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, OH, halo, CN, substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkoxyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3- e cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-4 alkenyl, and substituted or unsubstituted C2-4alkynyl.
15. The compound of any one of claims 1-13, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R24 is substituted or unsubstituted C1-6 alkyl.
16. The compound of any one of claims 1-13, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R24 is selected from the group consisting of F, Cl, and Br.
17. A compound, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein the compound is selected from Table 1.
18. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of any one of the preceding claims, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
19. A method of treating, preventing, delaying of progress, or ameliorating symptoms of a disease or a condition associated with ATXN3 expression level or activity level in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering a therapeutically effective amount of a compound or salt of any one of claims 1-17.
20. A method of modulating splicing of a ATXN3 pre-mRNA, comprising contacting a compound or salt of any one of claims 1-17 to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA with a splice site sequence or cells comprising the ATXN3 pre-mRNA, wherein the compound binds to the ATXN3 pre-mRNA and modulates splicing of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA in a cell of a subject to produce a spliced product of the ATXN3 pre-mRNA.
21. Use of a compound of any one of claims 1-17, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a condition or disease associated with ATXN3 expression level or activity level.
PCT/US2024/012061 2023-01-19 2024-01-18 Compositions useful for modulating splicing WO2024155846A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202363480558P 2023-01-19 2023-01-19
US63/480,558 2023-01-19

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024155846A1 true WO2024155846A1 (en) 2024-07-25

Family

ID=90053832

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2024/012063 WO2024155847A1 (en) 2023-01-19 2024-01-18 Compositions useful for modulating splicing
PCT/US2024/012061 WO2024155846A1 (en) 2023-01-19 2024-01-18 Compositions useful for modulating splicing

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2024/012063 WO2024155847A1 (en) 2023-01-19 2024-01-18 Compositions useful for modulating splicing

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (2) WO2024155847A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2014143607A1 (en) * 2013-03-11 2014-09-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Pyrrolopyridazines as potassium ion channel inhibitors
WO2022169864A1 (en) * 2021-02-05 2022-08-11 Ptc Therapeutics Inc. Methods for treating spinocerebellar ataxia type 3
WO2022169868A1 (en) * 2021-02-05 2022-08-11 Ptc Therapeutics Inc. Compounds for treating spinocerebellar ataxia type 3

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2014143607A1 (en) * 2013-03-11 2014-09-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Pyrrolopyridazines as potassium ion channel inhibitors
WO2022169864A1 (en) * 2021-02-05 2022-08-11 Ptc Therapeutics Inc. Methods for treating spinocerebellar ataxia type 3
WO2022169868A1 (en) * 2021-02-05 2022-08-11 Ptc Therapeutics Inc. Compounds for treating spinocerebellar ataxia type 3

Non-Patent Citations (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"Chemistry of Functional Groups", vol. 73, JOHN WILEY & SONS
"Organic Reactions", vol. 55, 1942, JOHN WILEY & SONS
"Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms", 1980, MARCEL DECKER
"Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy", 1995, MACK PUBLISHING COMPANY
AESOP CHO: "Recent Advances in Oral Prodrug Discovery", ANNUAL REPORTS IN MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 41, 2006, pages 395 - 407, XP009184520
FUHRHOP, JPENZLIN G: "Organic Synthesis: Concepts, Methods, Starting Materials", 1994, JOHN WILEY & SONS
H. O. HOUSE: "Modern Synthetic Reactions", 1972, W. A. BENJAMIN, INC.
HOFFMAN, R.V.: "Organic Chemistry, An Intermediate Text", 1996, OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
HOOVER, JOHN E.: "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences", 1975, MACK PUBLISHING CO.
LAROCK, R. C.: "Industrial Organic Chemicals: Starting Materials and Intermediates: An Ullmann's Encyclopedia", vol. 8, 1999, LIPPINCOTT WILLIAMS & WILKINS
NOGRADY: "Medicinal Chemistry A Biochemical Approach", 1985, OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS, pages: 388 - 392
ROOSEBOOM ET AL., PHARMACOLOGICAL REVIEWS, vol. 56, 2004, pages 53 - 102
S. R. SANDLER ET AL.: "Organic Functional Group Preparations", 1983, JOHN WILEY AND SONS, INC
SOLOMONS, T. W. G.: "Modern Carbonyl Chemistry", 2000, JOHN WILEY & SONS
STOWELL, J.C.: "Intermediate Organic Chemistry", 1993, WILEY-INTERSCIENCE
T. HIGUCHIV. STELLA: "Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems", A.C.S. SYMPOSIUM SERIES, vol. 14
T. L. GILCHRIST: "Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions, Mechanisms, and Structure", 1992, ACADEMIC PRESS, INC., pages: 352 - 401

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2024155847A1 (en) 2024-07-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
DE60315615T2 (en) TRICYCLIC COMPOUNDS BASED ON THIOPHES AND MEDICAMENTS COMPRISING THEM
CN103619841A (en) Heteroaryl compounds and methods of use thereof
AU2018223982B2 (en) 1, 4, 6-trisubstituted-2-alkyl-1H-benzo[d]imidazole derivatives as dihydroorotate oxygenase inhibitors
KR20190009377A (en) Thiophene compounds and methods for their synthesis and their use in medicine
WO2022060951A1 (en) Compositions for modulating splicing
AU2021320763A1 (en) Compositions for modulating splicing
WO2023081859A1 (en) Triazine amino derivatives for treating sca3
WO2024155846A1 (en) Compositions useful for modulating splicing
WO2024155842A1 (en) Compositions useful for modulating splicing
WO2022060943A1 (en) Compositions for modulating splicing
WO2023220433A1 (en) Compositions useful for modulating splicing
WO2023212231A1 (en) Compositions useful for modulating splicing
CN114163446B (en) PDE4 inhibitor with quinolinone skeleton and preparation method and application thereof
WO2024104331A1 (en) Prodrug of levodopa
TWI681960B (en) Benzimidazole derivatives, the preparation method thereof, and the use thereof in medicine
WO2022060944A1 (en) Compositions for modulating splicing
WO2023060173A1 (en) Compounds, compositions and methods of use
KR20240042472A (en) Muscarinic receptor 4 antagonists and methods of use
KR20240089748A (en) method
JP2020186182A (en) Proteolysis targeting compound

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24708021

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1